JP2021007867A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing fraudulent conduct.SOLUTION: A displacement member 18966 which is slid and displaced by the driving of a solenoid 961 is connected to a projection of a pair of wing members 945 and can cause opening and closing operation of the pair of wing members 945 by being slid and displaced. The displacement member 18966 includes a blade unit 18966g at the inner edge portion of an open hole 966c1. Thus, linked with operation which opens and closes the pair of wing members 945, the blade unit 18966 is brought into frictioning contact with edge portions of a second ball feeding portion 942c and rolling movement portion 943a for guiding the rolling movement of game balls entering a second winning port 140, and thereby a fraudulent object to be inserted into the second winning port 140 can be cut off.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 135

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotation and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-234009

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activities.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing fraudulent activities.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is rotatably supported by an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter and a position sandwiching the entry opening. A pair of wing members that open or close the wings, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members. A passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and a part of the transmission mechanism is a passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position. Cross the aisle.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position. The slide member includes a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the passage member.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes, the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member and mutually. It is provided with a pair of cutting members for rubbing the edges together.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of the rear base. It is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. It is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 34 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit in the line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 44 (b). (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block on the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit at the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view. , FIG. 56 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove in the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove in the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. FIG. 64A is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64A, and FIG. 64B is a projection plate of the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65A. It is sectional drawing of the member, the gear member and the groove forming member, and (c) is the sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. It is a front view of the game board in 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a ball throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. .. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit in line XCVIII-XCVIII of FIG. 97. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the specific winning opening unit in line CII-CII of FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is the specific winning opening unit and the specific winning opening unit in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the drive unit. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the sorting unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIX-CXIX line of FIG. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in 8th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the drive unit according to the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the displacement member in the tenth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit according to the fifteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 17th embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the eighteenth embodiment as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a cross-sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a sphere. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when it is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a player wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (expanded state) makes it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481,491,661,880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. The states in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively in the internal space of the back case 300. It is housed in order.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a front view frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L displaceable on the base member 410, a right displacement member 420R, and the like. A retracted position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the back side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, a third symbol display device). It can be displaced from the overhanging position on the front side of 81) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, it is possible to make the displacement mode of the displacement member different (form a plurality of types of displacement modes). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 is projected by a front view ring-shaped base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. A plurality of LEDs 651 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is displayed as a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 651 incident on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Can be clearly highlighted). Further, a structure that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is adopted. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a back base 830 arranged at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the overhanging position extending to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the overhanging position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP around the balance position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) that is displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) driving means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower drive is provided. When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive) is driven. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in different modes. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that produce an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are included in the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. , Left driven member 430L and right driven member 430R, carriage member 440, and upper left rack 450L and upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a slide formed at the lower end. It is provided with a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to a length dimension in which the tip protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 ( It is slidably inserted into (see FIGS. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted into the connecting shaft 441. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative posture change (rotation around the axis of the connecting hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and the drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted. .. Therefore, in either case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connecting hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 projecting from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is provided with two connecting shafts 441 arranged side by side in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by rolling the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is supported in a state of being suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted. It is provided with a rack gear 452.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, since the configurations are substantially the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the rack gear 452 is engraved in front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, the formed portion of the connecting hole 451 is offset to the front side, and the upper left rack 450R is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, both rack gears 452 are meshed with pinion gears 459 that are rotatably supported by the base member 410.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the raising cover 413 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 is a drive in which the first drive motor 481, the pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and the pinion gear 482 are meshed with each other. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the first gear 487a is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the gear 487e at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back surface of the left front cover 411L. The cover. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and their shafts. It is provided with a drive pin 484c projecting from the front at an end opposite to the side on which the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 to the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 484a as the center of rotation, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rail arranged in front of the base member 410, the tip rail arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and the base end rail and the tip rail. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is used as a base. It is moved up and down in the vertical direction with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) are in the state where the leading gear 487a is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front surface and the right front surface of the base member 410. It is rotatably supported between the cover and the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by moving the protruding member 485 up and down, the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated by utilizing the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and the rack gear 488a is engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the drive pin 488b is projected from the front at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. And each are provided. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and in a state where the rack gears 488a face each other, they are located between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 in the left-right direction (width direction). , FIG. 19 left and right direction) and slidably held.

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through the opening 410b formed in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) are rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gears 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to rotate with each other. It can be linearly moved in opposite directions (directions in which they are close to each other or separated from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L is as described above. It is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, for ease of understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 is a drive in which the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 are meshed with each other. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The upper portion (upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape in front view) of the base member 410 is formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially overlapped on the front side. Will be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of an upwardly protruding portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 protruding from the back of the overhanging portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and the like. It includes a shaft support hole 494a and a linear drive groove 494c located at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 494b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is moved from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494a as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced to the left or right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced to the left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L becomes the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the line, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls is formed on the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first aspect of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first aspect, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost side (the position where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and The protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowermost position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, they are shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 after passing through the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) toward each other and the projecting member 485 is raised until the state (extending position in the first aspect). In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are united (a state in which the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is a sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the above, the protruding member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear motion) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction close to each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. It acts on 421. As a result, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linear motion) in a direction closer to the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side (the displacement amount on the lower end side). That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially at the same time from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhang position (overhang position in the first aspect). The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach (see FIGS. 23 and 24) substantially at the same time. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (dolly member 440) is faster than that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving means of 1, and as in the present embodiment, 2 It was possible for the first time to use the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (bogie member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are improved. be able to.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions to those described above, FIGS. 21 and 22 show. After passing through the states shown, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) until the states (retracted positions) shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 are separated from each other, and the protruding member 485. Is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the overhanging positions in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (in the state of being arranged in the retracted position), the left displacement member 420L of the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates on the upper end side (axis center of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, it is allowed that the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L slides along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 is shown. When the 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third aspect of displacementing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhanging positions in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is permissible for member 420R to be lifted upwards.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), the drive arm is as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce a surprising effect of the player.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). As a result, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to produce a surprising effect of the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by translation (linear motion), while the second aspect. And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the motion form of the displacement is different. Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In this case, in the conventional product, there are some products in which the center of rotation remains constant and the displacement mode is changed by changing only the rotation direction, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are , Not only the rotation direction is different in the same rotation center, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also different (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect is The lower end side is the center of rotation), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) can be greatly changed in the displacement mode, which makes it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

Further, in the first aspect, where the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form in which rotation and translation (linear motion) are combined, the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. It is the same direction as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced in the proximity direction, and distinguish between them. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is raised as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the proximity direction, whereas in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction close to each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first aspect. You can expect the player to do that.

In the displacement unit 400, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are respectively arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged on the bogie member 440. The upper end side (connecting hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are rotatably connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first aspect) including a rotational component and rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required (). That is, in the case of a curved locus, not only a mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the bogie member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It will be necessary to provide the 488L and 488R with a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a straight line direction, and therefore the bogie member 440 may be guided by a rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize the rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in any of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common, and specifically, One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each mode, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a front view ring-shaped base member 610, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably arranged on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to be transmitted to the projection plate member 620. The gear train (gears 662 to 664) of the above is mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the back base 611 and the facing surfaces of the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the region inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “display region”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the region outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side is transmitted to the player to visually recognize the projection plate member 620 and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a manner of forming a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in the front view and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is meshed. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction with the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641, the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 651) for injecting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposites the outer peripheral surface). A plurality of (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of each LED 651 in the irradiation direction passes through the substantially center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the back side of the back surface base 611, and the gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back base 611 has an inner standing portion and 611a erected on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and an outer standing portion erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An intermediate erection part 611b erected between the erection part 611c, the inner erection part 611a and the outer erection part 611c, and an inner concave groove in an area surrounded by the inner erection part 611b and the inner erection part 611a. Mainly provided with 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation protrusion 611f projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected on the front side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611c is erected on the front side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by being divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

The inner concave groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. Is formed.

The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed by surrounding the ring-shaped plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. To.

The regulation protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axial center of the collar C. At the same time, a protrusion is formed on the front side. In the present embodiment, the regulation protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611a, the intermediate standing portion 611b, the outer standing portion 611c, and the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611 are supported. The erection portion 612a, the intermediate erection portion 612b, the outer erection portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are overlapped with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulation protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected in the area on the back surface of the front base 612 between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and allows the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XXXVI of FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 on the standing tip side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch 611b1 is formed at a position in phase with the notch 612b1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state where the erection tip surfaces of the intermediate erection portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), a substantially circular opening in front view is formed by the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2. To. These circular openings are formed at positions (positions having the same phase) facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650.

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the notches 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Will be done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The notch portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by notching a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a linear direction perpendicular to the radial direction. Will be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a pattern, a pattern, or the like over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in the front view. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed of an annular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is inclined from the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the back surface portion 632 on the back surface side, and the end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 to the front side. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is meshed as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined to the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is a virtual angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back portion 632 extending the back portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1 = θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view, and the cross section is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape, and the bent inside is formed. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from an end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38), and has a constant facing distance around the plane and the axis of the projection plate member 620 on the front side. Formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that abuts on the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and its cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed in a circular shape around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can be arranged on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and is inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is a virtual angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 extending the front portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3 = θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) to 40 (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. Note that FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) show transition states when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, in FIGS. 39 and 40, a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side (FIG. 3) of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (b) lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is from the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C even if the groove forming member 640 is displaced. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the color C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, in the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f, the axis of the collar C is the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 40 (a)) with the back side (upper side of FIG. 40 (a)) of the shaft of the shaft portion 612f. It is done in a state of being inclined to. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. As a result, the axis of the color C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)) so that the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collars. There was a problem that the assembly efficiency was poor because it was necessary to arrange the collars and both hands were used for the assembly.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the collar C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by lining the back base 611 from the back side on the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41 (a) to 43 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the cross-sectional line is not shown for easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 41 (b), 42 (b) and 43 (b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is the present invention. Considering that it does not affect the invention, the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced by incident on the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 is also emitted from the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the side of the back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge portion of the projection plate member 620.

That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, it is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, since the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body and light is incident from its end face (edge), the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident on the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, the refractive index of air is a value sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), so that the air travels inside the projection plate member 620. Light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Will be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light-transmitting material, and thus is irradiated. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel as well as the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and be emitted to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the thickness of the projection plate member 620 can be changed, or the intensity of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 (light intensity) can be increased without increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 is emitted. The amount of light can be increased to make the pattern or pattern stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is such that the groove forming member 640 is in the front direction with the light source A (on FIG. 42 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. Since the positions are shifted in the direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle β and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β can be transmitted to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and is advanced to the axial side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can be incident not only on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is such that the gear member 630 is in the back direction with the light source A (downward in FIG. 43A) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount of the misaligned arrangement. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the above-mentioned state (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted to the irradiation angle γ can be emitted. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLIVb of FIG. 44 (a). 45 (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (b) is an irradiation unit 650 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 44 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 is provided on a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in each of the present embodiments) first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged.

The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a horizontally long strip shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting means for irradiating light for incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the front surface of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (FIG. 44 (b) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. At the same time, the second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first block 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). Further, FIG. 46 (c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c).

The first block 653 has a front side (paper surface of FIG. 46 (a)) from a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the opposite side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by the connecting wall 653c, and the protrusion 653c1 is projected from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is located on the front side (front of the paper surface in FIG. 46 (c)) from the bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular front view and the side wall portion 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654a1 in front view is bored in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted therethrough.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by the connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 Can be fastened.

Insertion holes 653b1,654b1 are bored in the first block 653 and the second block 654 at two locations of the side wall portions 653b and 654b which are erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the arrangement positions of both blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and hold them at the arrangement positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to the first virtual surface (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and is symmetrical with respect to the second virtual plane that is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second first block 653 is arranged with respect to the first substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have both vertical and longitudinal directions with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is relative to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46C). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 of the second is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of one, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when assembling the second block 654 to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have both vertical directions with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability during the assembly work should be improved. Can be done.

It will be described back to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, respectively, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and a predetermined interval between the first block 653 and the second block 654. To.

Specifically, in the first block 653 and the second block 654, the front surface thereof is overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the open side thereof is arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 652 and 654 are provided with recesses on the side surface to be overlapped (arranged) on the substrate member 652, the electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652 are provided in the recesses (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and the connector from being damaged by the contact with the surrounding displaced members (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with surrounding displaced members (for example, projection plate member 620). it can. Further, the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) even in the portion where both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method of arranging (assembling method) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this way on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612, in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each holding pin 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. ..

As a result, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, by superimposing the front surface of the back surface base 611 on the back surface of the front surface base 612, the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, each LED 651 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650, but also the circumferential distance of the LED 651 between the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Will be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of such LED 651s being arranged (attached), each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 to a posture toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, which increases the labor of the arrangement work.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (8 in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed so as to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that the arrangement work of a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the labor of arranging the LED 651 can be reduced accordingly.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the back base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and only by inserting the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654, each LED651 Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the labor of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, vibration and the like occur. It is possible to suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input, or to correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in the front view). Will be set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be changed to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Further, since each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652, the substrate member 652 by both blocks 651 and 654. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction of FIGS. 44 and 45) of the substrate member 652. That is, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is formed in the connecting wall 654c in the second block 654, the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is increased accordingly. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b on which the fastening hole h is formed is on the side of the first block 653. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the longitudinal direction (FIGS. 44 and 45, left and right directions). ) Can be shortened to provide a space (a space is provided) between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening hole h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the influence of the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be made difficult to act on the LED 651, and the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself can be easily corrected in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations becomes large, the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b where the fastening hole h is formed, and the protrusion 653c1 projecting from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the substrate member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost, and the direction thereof can be further increased. It can be easier to maintain.

Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the outermost side in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, they are not constrained by the second block 654), such longitudinal direction. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front surface side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. Further, FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 is provided on the front base 830 having a rectangular shape in front view, the front base 820 superposed on the front side of the back base 830, and the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 to be arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. It mainly includes a connecting member 870 that connects the 860, the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear base 830 projects to the axial centers of the opening 831 formed so that the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes a shaft portion 832, 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 that protrudes to the front side and extends in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back surface side of the back surface base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the back base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 823 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, respectively, and are formed in a columnar shape on the front side from the back base 830.

The back side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the front side of the back base 830, and is a connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with an outer shape slightly larger than that of the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side of the paper surface to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge portion on the back surface side, and projects toward the back surface side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 to be formed, a front side regulating portion 824 extending to the back surface side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding to the back surface side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 in the front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap for arranging the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 described later between the back surface base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. As a result, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state between them.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion to which one end side (upper side of FIG. 48) of the urging spring SP, which will be described later, is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed to protrude on the back side of the front base 820.

The front side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the direction toward the front of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the back side of the front base 820, and is along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to the urging spring SP described later at a predetermined interval, and is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 to the back surface side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is applied to the transmission gears 863 via the transmission gears 861 and 862 by engaging the gears in series. Is transmitted to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a protruding portion 863c that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. Mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

The tooth portion 863a is a tooth mating surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is projected to the back surface side in a columnar shape, and the shaft is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed so as to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed by being curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of the position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed. It is formed so as to project radially outward on the side surface that is not used.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in the front view, and is formed in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end of FIG. 48). The gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and the contact formed so as to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. A unit 873 is provided.

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. As a result, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. As a result, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. Will be done.

Further, the width dimension of the tip of the contact portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance dimension between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 in between. .. Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (shaft support) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed in. As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, so that it can be prevented from falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the urging spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 to transmit the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed through the one end side end of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, with the pin member 890 inserted through the shaft hole 851, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840. , The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a state where it can rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end of FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position where the displacement member 850 projects from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side, and the protruding distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed up to a position that substantially coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and is lower than the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the position (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821, 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to the increase in the resistance at one place.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. Note that FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

Further, at the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b was connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotationally drive the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement of the connecting member 870 are displaced. The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when displaced from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead center), power is supplied to the drive motor 880. This is explained when is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863. At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP It is in a state where the force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be made to perform a reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be regarded as a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement is different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the embodiment, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and the structure and control can be adjusted. Since there is no need to complicate the product, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is a rotational displacement about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 is released from the transmission mechanism 860, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is released. When the displacement member 850 is subjected to a reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction. The displacement can be a combination of a rotational motion centered on the shaft hole 851. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is rotated with the push and pull. Since the posture of the 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and it is possible to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 Since the straight line connecting the axes and the straight line connecting the axes of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are located at substantially orthogonal positions, the force in the pushing-pull direction is applied. The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the equilibrium position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed. Can be easily continued.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged downward. , The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

In the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axes of the hole 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. In addition, in FIGS. 57A to 57C, a part of the transmission gear 863 (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57A, at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the back base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to facilitate the maintenance of the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is second. In the state of driving the drive range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the back base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance to displace the connecting member 870 is reduced. , The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the displacement member that is displaced vertically is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force for stopping the transmission gear 870 is the force stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and the force stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving the drive motor 880) is stopped. It can be dispersed into one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. Note that FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c) show the transition state from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the first position to the second position As the displacement to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced in accordance with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position, so that the displacement member 850 is first. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, so that the stopped state is quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Can be formed, so that the resistance for displacement of the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the overhanging operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocated with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion is provided. The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c). 59 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55. FIG. 59 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Is placed in.

That is, the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape due to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is regulated.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are tilted in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

As a result, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is on a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with the axis of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles against the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, whereby the shaft of the transmission gear 863 The inclination of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. It is set to be the same as the outer diameter dimension of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection on the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light on a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view and has a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C inward, and the recessed width is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. Note that in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b) and 63 (b), the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at this time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front side and the back surface side of the projection plate member 2620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. As a result, the edge portion of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted by the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation that irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing), the light applied to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is emitted to the projection plate member 2620. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having an irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the back edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface at the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

That is, by denting the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by denting it on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the color C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the amount of the irradiation angle Δ being added. Therefore, the intensity (light intensity) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment have been described. , A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a projection taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640.

65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. 65 (a). It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65 (c) shows the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are formed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front surface. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and protrusions 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side are formed on the outer edge portion thereof.

The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the back side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge portion. Further, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the line of the virtual line F whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Will be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of the virtual line G whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. To.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is screwed through a concave groove 3635 formed on the side surface on the front side (upper side of FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and penetrating the groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. A stop hole 636 for use is provided.

The concave groove 3635 is a groove that is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of each stop hole 636. As a result, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64 (b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a circular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the concave groove 3645 which is recessed on the side surface on the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an opening 646 for screwing.

The concave groove 3645 is a groove that is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. As a result, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 come into contact with each other is the opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force thereof. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, it is possible to secure a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66B, as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the light having an irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axis center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily reached to the reflecting portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to make the pattern. And the design can be clearly highlighted.

On the other hand, the light emitted to an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first embodiment. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the form.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and the light is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed from being incident. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display applied to the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Further, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when the light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the ground contact surface can be secured and the projection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted into the axial side of the projection plate member 3620 through the gap. There was a risk of light leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is caused by the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Further, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the size of the side surface of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light intensity) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. Further, FIG. 68A is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is attached to each head of the one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that cannot be contacted with the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By bringing it into contact with the head of S2, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the LED 651 from being damaged.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the parts can be relaxed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in the shape of a front view disk and is rotated around the center of the circle has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangle in front view. The case where it is formed in the above direction and is slidably displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged in a base member 5610 which is formed in a circular shape in a front view and has an open central portion thereof, and a slide displaceable portion in the opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and a projection plate member for driving force of the drive motor 661. A gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668) for transmitting to the 5620 is mainly provided.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in the front view, and is arranged in front of the back base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof and the back base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611. The front base 5612 is provided, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5) are provided in the internal space formed between the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in the front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on the outer edge portion on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view at the center portion. The central opening 5612h to be formed, the inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k formed so as to project from between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back surface side, and a sliding projection 5612 m formed to project from below the central opening portion 5612h to the back surface side. Rectangle.

The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 in front view. The player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding the rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 which is recessed on the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the protruding surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger than. Further, the pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging the holding portion covers 5628 provided with the above at both ends, the rod member 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion serving as a rotation shaft of the rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged at a position symmetrical with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side to the back side of the central opening 5612h. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is displayed as a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the opening at the center of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position invisible from the front side of the projected unit 5600 in the assembled state. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion thereof.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). There is, and it is formed in the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and is opened long in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. A detailed description of the operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) and a horizontally long rectangle facing the projection plate member 5620 across the rod member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is arranged.

The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. It is sandwiched between them and arranged on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 includes a groove portion 5626a recessed in the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimensions in the vertical direction and the front side are set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Will be done.

As a result, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed with respect to the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Further, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 with respect to the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 can be arranged so as not to protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and forms a groove in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to advance and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases as the thickness dimension is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 with the rod member 5625 arranged inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

Further, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off from the front base 5612, so that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668), and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is arranged with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is placed at the opposite position. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be incident on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 to make the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 stand out.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view is formed on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back surface side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. As a result, the rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting a protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

Rotating members 5670 are attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located on the center side in the left-right direction, and an irradiation unit on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k, and the front base. It is arranged at 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the back surface side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where it is arranged on the front base 5612. It is positioned and formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 with respect to the LED 651. As a result, the downward displacement of the rotating member 5670 on the one end side is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is the displacement regulating projection. It is possible to suppress being blocked by 5612j.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. In addition, in FIG. 74 and FIG. 76, the state in which the back base 5611 is removed is shown. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at substantially the central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening portion 5612h, the rotations arranged on both sides in the left-right direction. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides of FIG. 74 (a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the light of the LED 651 can be incidented accordingly. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right in the front view (see FIG. 73 and right), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side in the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction. As a result, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing up one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k which is the rotating axis. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653 in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to positions on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, if the LED arranged at another position is turned on according to the displacement to keep the light amount of the projection plate member constant, the displacement is determined. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the LED control becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the product cost can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced irradiated body (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiated bodies (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated body, the irradiation range of each irradiated body There is a problem that a part with a weak amount of light is formed between the two, and when the irradiated body is displaced, light and darkness is created, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of light and darkness due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be transferred to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive means for displacementing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base 5612 and then the wiring is connected, the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base, so that the process at the time of assembly can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced in the same manner to form the first state.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement regulating projection 5612j to regulate its rotation range.

The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is detailed because, as described above, the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are simply reversed left and right. The description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 is a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape in front view, and a projection plate member partially visibly arranged from an opening formed in the base member 6610. The 6620, the irradiation unit 650 that incidents light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, the drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for the purpose is mainly provided.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed on the facing surface between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an opening in which a front view ring-shaped shielding member 6612r is formed on the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. Part 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in the front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612r, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 and in the area between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c of the outer edge portion of the opening 6612p, and the back base 611 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612. By superimposing the front surfaces of the two bases, the two bases 611 and 612 are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space).

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in a ring shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the front base 6612 having a ring shape. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Since it is provided), it can be made difficult for the player to see, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. When the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to form a front base 6612. It is made visible to the player through the opening 6612p of. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside the projection plate member 6620. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc. are formed in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. To. In the present embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflecting portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflecting areas 6622a to 6622f of the six forms of the pattern or pattern are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, in the projection plate member 6620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662-664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is shown. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection region 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view (viewing from the back of the paper to the front). The reflection region 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns that emerge inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f, the player reflects the light. The display of the areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other areas can be seen, which impairs the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. As a result, a plurality of different patterns or patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated body is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible region (opening) of the irradiated body is used. From 6612p), the pattern or pattern switching of the irradiated body can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before the pattern or pattern switching is completed, so that the player can see the switching of the irradiated body. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Further, even if the power of the light source (LED651) that irradiates the irradiated body with light is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated body, the irradiated body is affected by the light of another device or a fluorescent lamp in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and pattern of the irradiated body could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is made difficult to see and becomes transparent. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern switching of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in the front view and is rotated around the center thereof, the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced as compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, if the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the arrangement space in the left-right or vertical direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern and the number of the projection plate member 6620 on the drawing side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns.

Next, the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in the winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, the left-right rear side of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the left-right direction, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or the rear side).

First, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 82, the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the base plate 60, a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 in front view, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front of the paper surface of FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and a specific winning opening unit 950 thereof. Mainly, the drive unit 960 arranged on the back surface (front side of the paper in FIG. 83B) of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 is other than the passage path of the game ball formed in the front unit 940 described later (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and specific winning opening 65a). It is possible to suppress the passage of the through hole 60a from the space.

A part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. Will be done. A detailed explanation of the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is arranged on the wing member 945 via the displacement member 966. Be connected. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In addition, in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. 87 (b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is arranged on the back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball 943. And two (pair) wing members 945, which are rotatably arranged between the back base 941 and the front base 943, are mainly provided.

The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while being formed in a substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is upside down. Further, the back base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and penetrates the base plate 60 through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The rear base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by notching on the flow side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87 (b)). b) Opposite to the specific winning opening 65a, which is located above) and is formed through a long rectangular shape in the horizontal direction, the second winning opening 140, which is formed through above the specific winning opening 65a, and the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at the side edge.

Further, the back surface base 941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through hole 941a has a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) toward the back side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) and the through hole 941a1 from the back side toward the front side. It is formed from a second through hole 941a2 that is reduced in diameter.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the tapping screw. Will be done. Further, since the first through hole 941a1 is formed by reducing the diameter from the front side to the back side as described above, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a projecting from the back surface of the back surface base 941 in a columnar shape is formed.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. To. As a result, the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state where the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

Further, since the second through hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the back surface side to the front surface side as described above, the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding toward the back surface of the back surface base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to prevent the screw head from coming into contact with the specific winning opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the back base 941 in the direction of gravity is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. A01) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge portion of the notch bottom portion (the upper edge portion in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () The game ball that has not flowed into any of them can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87B)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941 g that protrudes toward the game area side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) and is formed in a cup shape, and a side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 (Fig. 87)). b) A first throwing portion 942 g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941 g is formed in a size capable of accepting one game ball inside. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941 g (first winning opening 64) can flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941 g can be thrown to the back side (first throwing portion 942 g side) via the first winning opening 64.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g faces the second winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))) from the upper ends of both ends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is provided so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface on the side opposite to the game area (rear side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the flowing region from colliding with the first receiving portion 941g and damaging the first receiving portion 941g.

Further, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the game area becomes insufficient, so that the game ball It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be impaired, by colliding the game ball with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired. ..

Further, since the guide portion 941 g1 is formed so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941 g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally outward of the back base 941. As a result, the game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60 can be re-collised, and the flow direction of the game ball can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance dimension between the opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first throwing portion 942g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))), and the protruding tip side is the throwing unit described later. It comes into contact with the edge of the inflow port 982d of 970. As a result, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g to the first throwing portion 942 g via the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

The first throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which the upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942 g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in the front view, and the inner edge is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that is thrown between the opposite wings members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the second winning opening 140).

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall portion 941b projecting to the front side (game area side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper surface)) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87)) at its edge. (B) A second throwing portion 942c protruding from the paper surface front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The size of the front side wall portion 941b is set so that the protruding tip surface abuts on the throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second throwing portion 942c is formed by bending at both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140 in a substantially L-shape in the rear view. The size of the second throwing unit 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

In the pair of second throwing portions 942c, the distance dimension between the opposing surfaces in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction), and the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c, a second recessed portion 942c1 is formed by notching the protruding tip portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B)). The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which the protrusion 981b1 of the passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (upper side of FIG. 87 (b))) from the game area side of the back base 941 to the side opposite to the game area. A first shaft hole 941d recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and formed through the back base 941 and their respective parts. A protruding portion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b, which is located on the outer side of the two first openings 941e in the opposite direction and protrudes to the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Formed with and.

The first shaft hole 941d can support the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. As a result, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape about the center of the first shaft hole 941d. Further, the first opening 941e is capable of inserting the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protrusion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portions are located on a plane substantially the same as the central position between the facing portions of the wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed so as to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension thereof is set to be slightly larger than the facing distance dimension of the wing member 945 in the closed state. To. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of 966.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and are extended in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a long rectangular opening formed in the opposite direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87B) of the pair of wing members 945, and the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the back base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the circumference of the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite the game area), and recesses from the back side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided with a recess 941h to be provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the standing portion 942f.

The recess 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952, which is the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, is inserted in the state where the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (b). ) A second guide wall 942d protruding upward) is provided.

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, when the displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), the displacement member 966 and the back surface of the back base 941 are separated from each other. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is arranged between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 at the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The back base 941 is half toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) at the edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87 (b)) on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the specific winning opening 65a. A second out port 941f formed by notching in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the base plate 60, and is a game ball. It is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of.

Further, at the edge of the second out port 941f, a third throwing portion 942e formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view and projecting to the back surface side is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown to the back side via the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in the rear view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the back side. A detailed description of the game ball that rolls on the inner surface of the third throwing unit 942e will be described later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a projecting at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside in the front view. Further, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side (U-shaped open side) of the second receiving portion 943c. Further, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back surface base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown between the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. it can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c is a first concave portion recessed in a circular shape from the throwing guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof and the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). It includes 943ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

A pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87B) of the pair of wing members 945. Further, the pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end faces are brought into contact with each other. .. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the facing space of the pair of wing members 945 can be thrown between the facing surfaces of the ball throwing guide unit 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the back surface of the back base 941. It is projected to the side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. Can be thrown to.

Further, the front base 943 is provided with an annular protrusion 943b projecting in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b is provided with a second shaft hole 943b1 on the inner edge thereof, and the other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can flow into the back surface through the second out port 941f. The ball can be thrown to the side (opposite the game area).

Further, in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, the first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screws inserted in the second through hole 941a2 described above are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Will be done. As a result, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

The wing members 945 are arranged in pairs with the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 941 in between in the front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back surface base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate in a state where the wing member 945 can rotate. Can be placed between facing each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be displaced in a closed state in which the facing side surfaces are parallel to the gravity direction and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the facing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission portion that is connected to the displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the displacement member 966 is arranged at the tip thereof via the first opening 941e of the rear base 941. The size is set so as to project to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the back base 941. A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90B) at a substantially central position in the front view. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90 (a)), the longitudinal direction, and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90B) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. To be equipped.

The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 facing in the width direction and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed so as to bulge on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side), respectively. As a result, the area in which the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, come into contact with each other can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a long rectangular shape in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90 (a))). , The other side contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90A)) is provided.

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface on which the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, comes into contact. In the displacement member 966, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion 966b2 and being slidably displaced.

The other side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface on which the side surface of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, is in contact with the bulging portion 965e1. The displacement member 966 displaces the wing member 945 in a closed state (see FIG. 91) by abutting the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 against the other side contacted portion 966b3 and sliding displacement. Can be done.

Next, the connection state of the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). In addition, in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed parallel to the facing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (connecting hole 966b1 side) and abuts on the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 in an open state, and the lower inner surface 966a4 faces the lower inner surface 966a4 and the protrusions. The upper inner surface 966a3 that comes into contact with the 945b and displaces the wing member 945 in the closed state, and the lateral side of the displacement member 966 from the lateral side (left-right direction in FIG. 91) to the lower inner surface 966a4 side. It is provided with an inclined surface 966a5 which is inclined to.

The displacement member 966 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back surface base 941 by the transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 hits the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of wing members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at a predetermined interval are formed vertically, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The sliding groove 966a2 is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the protrusion 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945 and the sliding groove 966a2 through which the protrusion 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member 966 is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 does not tilt with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for arranging the displacement members in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is placed in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (other side in the direction of gravity), the inertial force increases by the amount of the weight of the displacement member 966 being added, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state is started to be driven and displaced to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the protrusions 945b are located on the lower side (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing members 945. Be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. As a result, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (own weight). Can be made to. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

Further, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5 to guide the displacement member. The slide displacement of the 966 toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) can be smoothly started.

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced accordingly. In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the gravitational direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can also be regulated by the contact of. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member 945 when it is in the closed state. That is, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is moved from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower part of FIG. 92). It is displaced to the side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 92). As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the own weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 has a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion 963 formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other, and a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion. The solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the 963s, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are pivotally supported and connected to the connecting member 964. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). It is provided with a guide portion 962b protruding from the reference).

The lining portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. Further, the lining portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in the direction facing the outside of the facing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging the engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be engaged. The workability of fastening with can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 in a state where the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is formed on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). It is provided with a through hole 962 da that penetrates toward it.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and has an inner diameter larger than that of the fastening hole 963b1. Is formed in. As a result, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view connected to the facing wall surface of the lining portion 962a and the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a front view gate type. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962 g projecting from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the lining portion 962a (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the dimension between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portion 962e on the tip end side (bending side), respectively, and the shape in front view thereof is formed to be larger than the shape in front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, in the wall portion 962f, the outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is the opposite direction of the pair of first guide walls 942 b of the back base 941 described above. It is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93A) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the standing portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (L5 = L6). As a result, the displacement member 966 can be arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be arranged between the facing portions.

The projecting portion 962g is formed so as to project from the outside of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposite direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) to the side opposite to the arm portion 962e, and the protruding dimension thereof is the rear base 941. It is set to be substantially the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the inner dimension L7 of the projecting portion 962g in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. It is set large. Further, the protrusion 962g is set so that the dimension in the direction of gravity is substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f facing each other.

As a result, when arranging the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the protruding portions 962g and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b. By inserting the projecting portion 962g between the standing portions 942f facing each other, the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged with respect to the rear base 941.

The second accommodating portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box shape that covers the other side (lower side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610. The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction (left-right direction in FIG. 93B) of the solenoid 610, which will be described later in the top view. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is located on the side of the first accommodating portion 962 from between the recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations. The engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, the protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)). ) Is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

The protruding portion 963b is formed so as to project outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. As a result, the screw inserted through the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 to fasten and fix the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side toward the first accommodating portion 962 and the tip thereof bends inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. To. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is formed. The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered on the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 has a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted inside the main body 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side opposite to the main body 961a of the shaft 961b. A ring portion 961c arranged at the end of the ring portion 961c and a coil spring SP1 arranged between the ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are provided.

The main body 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body 961a can be pulled inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the back surface base 941 side, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to protrude from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. As a result, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the back base 941 side from the other side in the gravity direction of the base portion 964a (FIG. 85). (See) Formed with an upright portion 964b that bends to the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 93B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. A first recessed portion 964c is provided, and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b is provided with an insertion hole 964e that penetrates in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protruding portion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The transmission member 965 is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a tip portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and a rotation extending to the connecting member 964 side while being connected to the tip portion 965a. It is formed from the portion 965b.

The rotating portion 965b is formed so that the width dimension of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is smaller than the dimension between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Will be done. Further, the rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) at the end on the 964 side, and the radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. It is provided with a protruding portion 965d that protrudes to one end side in the direction of gravity.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965c, the distance between the protruding tips is set to be larger than the distance between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. As a result, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and arranged inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable around the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in the top view. Further, the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). It is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion holes 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension of the rotating shaft 965c in the axial direction becomes smaller as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 965a includes an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the tip thereof, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Is formed with.

The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610. Further, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, a coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body 961a and the ring 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is extruded in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in the direction away from the main body 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96A) and the solenoid 610 side of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964. It is in a state of being in contact with the inner surface of the solenoid. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96A) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965 g in contact with the second accommodating portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is pulled into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought close to each other (rather than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction close to the main body portion 961a (on the right side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction close to the main body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 It is assumed that the inner surface of the solenoid 610 side and the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) are in contact with each other. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side (upper side in FIG. 96B) in the direction of gravity about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connecting portion between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b of the transmission member 965 coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, when the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963. Can be brought into contact. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is thick. Therefore, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965 becomes abnormal, it is possible to make it easier for the store operator to detect the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966 with the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, and is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. , The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set with the tip portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance of the rotating portion 965b is set to be substantially the same as the combined distance, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made the same as that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 increases. The whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, whereby the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which are opposite to the displacement member 966. As a result, the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling portion 943a (ball throwing unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 to reduce the overall size. Can be planned.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 98 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 98 (a)), FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (a) and As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are in contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is slid displacement to the other side in the gravity direction. Will be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning opening 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, the wing member 945 is opened by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the direction of gravity by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 arranged in the solenoid 610 as described above. It is displaced to the side (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98A, the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are brought into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is moved to one side in the direction of gravity. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, the wing member 945 is closed by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed while the power supply (supply) to the main body 961a is cut off, the main body 961a can be closed if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or due to a player's fraudulent act. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being opened and the game ball from easily flowing into the second winning opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by the connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced as the transmission member rotates. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When acted on, the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and also to the transmission member 965 at two places. If so, the change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 is difficult to tolerate, and the resistance when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated) is increased. It occurs and prevents the opening or closing of the wing members. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the pair of wing members is connected. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945s, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b (FIG. 98). It is set to be less than 3 times (see (a)). This makes it easier to tolerate a change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 Where the contact is easy and the change in posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted, the posture of the displacement member 966 is set by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. It is possible to prevent changes from being regulated. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a figure. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 has a ball-entry member 953 formed in a box-like body opened by the player side (front side of the paper in FIG. 99) and the opening of the ball-entry member 953. A plate member 951 arranged so as to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 sandwiched therein, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951 are provided. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed of a colored translucent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a shaft hole 951b formed in a cylindrical shape on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. It is formed to include a protrusion 951c protruding from one end toward the ball entry member 953, and an engaging portion 951d projecting from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the ball entry member 953.

The main body 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later in front view, and is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. ..

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side of the main body portion 951a in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953 by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 in a state of being inserted into the shaft hole 951b.

The protrusion 951c is formed so as to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game region side, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. A tip portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, in the engaging portion 951d, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the flow-down region side, so that the game ball flowing down into the main body portion 951a is the main body portion 951a. It is possible to suppress the fall from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the.

The ball entry member 953 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erection wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c projecting from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a in a ring shape, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d projecting from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding portion 953 g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a protrusion 953h protruding from the open side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951 side, and two locations penetrating the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a. It is formed with an inflow port of 953j.

The main body 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion having a size capable of inserting a game ball, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. It is formed with 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the standing portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the pair of wing members 945 described above on the outer side in the opposite direction. As a result, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of wing members 945, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

The inner edge of the opening 953a1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in the open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. it can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body portion 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The erection wall 953b is a wall for holding the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and surrounds the outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view in three directions. Formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the erection wall 953b. As a result, the detection device SE1 can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by the erection wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the erection wall 953b side at the tip portion separated from the base end side by the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f from engaging with each other and the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to the inflow port 953j described later, and can pass a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed so as to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and screws for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 are screwed into the inner edge portion thereof.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the distance dimension between the wall portions 953d is formed shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protruding dimension smaller than the recessing distance of the recess 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming off.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole for inserting a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955, which will be described later, into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. Will be done.

The projecting portion 953 g is formed so as to project on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are coaxially arranged and the protrusion The setting portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed so as to project toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge portion of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusions 953h are formed at substantially the same positions in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending the game ball flowing into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in pairs in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the ball entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the ball entry port. The machine is known. The entry port is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entry opening are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the ball entry port is enlarged, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member becomes longer. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inflow ports 953j are formed in pairs (at two locations) at predetermined intervals, so that even if the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a is enlarged, the inflow port 953j can be reached. The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j can be shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at the connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. As a result, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened and do not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity. That is, a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state are arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945). Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow down the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the inflow of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 is large. The inflow port 953j can be approached. As a result, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress over-winning of the game ball to the ball entry member 953.

The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in front view is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape in front view of the ball entry member 953 described above. Further, the passage member 955 includes a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, and a ball entry member 953 side located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side. A second opening 955b formed through the ball, a pair of third openings 955c formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion of the third opening 955c on the other side in the gravity direction. It is formed by including a rolling portion 955d to be provided and a second recessed portion 955f located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball through which the detection hole SE1a is inserted, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which the connecting member 957c and the transmission member 958 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that projects in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for arranging the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the gravity direction, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in the front view. .. As a result, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 is projected toward the ball entry member 953 in a state of being arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Further, an engaging portion 955e projects toward the drive unit 957 side at the edge portion of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inward of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is formed by being curved in an arc shape. Further, in the rolling portion 955d, the end portion on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning opening unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

As described above, the second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction of FIG. 99C) of the passage member 955 is the second of the drive unit 960 described above. It is set larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the accommodating portion 963.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955 g is formed in a columnar shape, and the fastening hole 955 g1 is recessed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950), and faces the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed at the position where it is. As a result, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed by including a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b covering the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c arranged at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a is a rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 957a1, a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and a side opposite to the main body portion 957a1 of the shaft portion 957a2. It is provided with an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end of the ring and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body 957a1 by the magnetism can be pulled inside the main body 957a1 and inserted. Will be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the passage member 955, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to project from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. Further, when the power supply (supply) is cut off after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box shape that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. Further, the case member 957b is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating the shaft portion 957a2 in the axial direction and an opening 957b2 penetrating the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip portion of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c is a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion thereof. A second recessed portion 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 are provided.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is arranged inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular lateral view. The transmission member 958 includes a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a that projects in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from an end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion that projects toward the plate member 951 side. Formed with 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. Further, the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is arranged by being inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. As a result, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CII-CII line of FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950.

It should be noted that FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a) show the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the open state of the plate member 951. Further, the closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is the main body of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state of being separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), in a state where the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the shaft portion 957a2 is a plate member due to the urging force of the coil spring SP2. It is in a state of protruding toward the 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)). As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is pushed out toward the plate member 951. As a result, the force is transmitted to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)) about the shaft hole 958b.

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. Is rotated to. As a result, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player illegally operates the plate member 951 side to forcibly open the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is pulled (adsorbed) inside the main body 957a1. It is said to be in a state of being. As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body portion 958a1 side is arranged with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. It is displaced to (right side in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction in which the tip portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102 (b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is rotated in the direction of As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the own weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. It is possible to suppress the force applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). Note that FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Further, in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the closed state of the plate member 951 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that inclines unilaterally in the gravity direction from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104 (a)) of the main body 953a. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c projecting at the connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and each surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an erection wall 954d erected in succession.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls a game ball flowing in between a pair of inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j side, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. .. As a result, the game ball flowing into the space opposite to the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (lower side in FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a to receive the gaming ball and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, it is different before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of the game ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104B). As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (horizontal direction in FIG. 104 (b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the accepted game ball is shortened to the passage member 955. It can be guided (inflowed) in time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b is set so that the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). As a result, when the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Is formed. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled toward the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is swiftly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

The erection wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. 2 The guide surface 954d1 is provided.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and is formed with the longitudinal end portion of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. As a result, the game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

The projecting portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and are projecting toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). .. That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, one surface is connected to a surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one surface of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side. Is formed by being connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the gaming ball (longitudinal outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the gaming ball. It is formed so as to be inclined to the side. As a result, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is increased, and the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a in the lateral direction, when the plate member 951 is in an open state, it is formed. The end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (on the gravity direction) side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body 951a.

Further, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. Can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is provided for the game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Since there is a low risk of jumping out from the outside, by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to suppress rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, it can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the guide surface 954c1 can be overcome and guided to the erection wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flowed into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before closing the opening 953a1 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c extends in a direction in which the side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the standing wall 954d is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erection wall 954d is extended in a direction in which the protruding portion 954c and the second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface on the opposite side are substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the side edge portion 954c3 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d to reliably decelerate and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, the erection wall 954d is set so that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the erection wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the rolling of the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c to decelerate. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

In the projecting portion 954c, the distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the recess 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in.

In addition, in FIGS. 105A and 105B, the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a operating the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83A) are connected to the solenoid 610 operating. A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83 (a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where the specific winning opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap with each other in the front view. Is formed in. As a result, a space can be formed on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the second winning opening 140 (pair of wing members 945).

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a A game machine including a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a and a second driving means for driving the plate member 951 is known. However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively, these pair of wing members 945 and the plate. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951 and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices are arranged. Space can be secured on the back surface of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged in the vicinity of the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is far from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) arranged in the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is the base plate. It can be retracted to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the 60 to make it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operation unit is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (evacuation), making it difficult for the player to see, and at the same time, the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 during movement (extension). ), Which makes it easier for the player to see, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged near the central opening is a specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By arranging the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, it is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of evacuation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (evacuation). As a result, when the movable body is operated to bring it into an overhanging state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 in the front view is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 provided with two displacement members (plate member 951 and a pair of wing members 945), the respective drive means (drive unit 957 and the drive unit 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is arranged, each drive means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back surface side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945). Space can be formed.

Further, the plate member 951 is specified because the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105A, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 105A). It is installed side by side along. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. A01) by the pair of wing members 945, and the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the pair of wing members 945. The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is arranged via the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is the back base. Since it is connected to 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (arranged) by the front base 943 at the same time as the action of fastening and fixing the back base 941 to the front base 943. As a result, when the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13), it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960.

In the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960, the positions of the ends on the opposite side (rear side) of the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950 are set to substantially the same position, and the drive unit is set. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end portion of the specific winning opening unit 950 opposite to the plate member 951 side (rear side). This makes it easier to organize the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being separated on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the game board 13, and it is possible to prevent the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged in a posture in which the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 are oriented in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the side opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957 can be easily combined.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. As a result, the shape of the partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged can be simplified.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or both sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step in the direction of gravity. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a barrier of a conductor for partitioning an arrangement region of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 and another region and limiting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

Further, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is located at the tip thereof (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the wing member 966 is arranged, the second prize is compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the back side of the mouth 140. Further, unlike the conventional product, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, it is not necessary to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950, so that the second winning opening unit 950 side. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in pairs with the specific winning opening unit 950 in the front view. Will be set up. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is fraudulently applied from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to detect the illegality. There was a risk of being done.

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden in the plate member 951 and the clerk cheats on the ball entry member 953. Is difficult to find.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, it is detected. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 is made to be the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to be able to detect fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1 because it is shielded from the screen and the location where fraud is applied becomes invisible.

Further, since the detection device SE1 is the same as the detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detects other game balls (off-the-shelf product), the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is secured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing devices SE1. Therefore, when the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the clerk cannot be notified of the player's fraudulent activity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 is damaged (broken wire) due to the fraudulent act. ) Can be made easier. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily suppress the fraudulent activity.

Further, an annular protrusion 953c for screwing a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and an error is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is screwed into the annular protrusion 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. By setting the fastening position of the above, the unshielded area in the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with screws, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult to perform.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound and arranged around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegal act is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such an illegal act can be made more difficult to perform. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c and arranged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a force in the shear direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction to detect it. A force in the shear direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, the wiring HS3 is connected to the detection device SE1 when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950. The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connecting portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position biased toward the end portion of the detection device SE1 on the side opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annular projection 953c) of the screw, so that the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such fraud can be made more difficult to perform.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 is a distribution unit 980 arranged on the player side (game area side) and provided with a space through which the game ball can be inserted, and the game area of the distribution unit 980. It is formed with a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side to the above.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the opposite side of the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, the game ball can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 is provided with a plurality of openings (first insertion holes 991a to second insertion holes 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 disposed on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. It is mainly provided with a distribution portion 983 arranged in a possible state and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution portion 983 on the back surface side of the back surface base 985.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a housing portion 986b and a protrusion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h. Formed in preparation.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109 (b)) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (FIG. 109 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the openings 985b and 985c. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are extended in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 in the space opening on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space opening on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. It is mainly provided with intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 that communicate with the passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3,985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, recessed portions 985f4 are formed which are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are formed so as to be connected to the spaces of the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 from increasing in length in the gravity direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990 described later in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the opening 985d. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be minutely large due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be arranged.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987, which will be described later, is inserted. By screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, the second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction. It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. ..

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982, which will be described later, sandwiched between the first guide walls 981f. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the open portion of the semicircle faces the substantially central side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (a)) along the edge portion thereof. Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the upright tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erection tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. The ball throwing passage TR0 is formed, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0 are provided. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. Further, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that is in the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Formed at overlapping positions.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting to the side opposite to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first throw from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1. The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side in the gravity direction of the portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown into the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g It can be difficult to get caught in between.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

In the erection wall 982a, the distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is set between the opposite sides. The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the passage can pass are formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the rear base 985, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983 described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized. ..

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is extended toward the back base 985 side toward one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, so that the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h and the recess 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected tip surface descends toward the back base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)). Be tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 to guide them toward the openings 985e and 985f. It can be easily flowed into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and is guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball at the opening 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 becomes difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portion 982h1,982j1 is erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is played by the thickness of the guide portion 982h1,982j1. There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily made visible even in the state of passing through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back surface base 985 side as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. The through hole 983c to be formed, the contact portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and the wall portion 983e formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back surface base 985 side. It is formed mainly with and.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, so that the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated while the distribution portion 983 is rotatable. It is arranged between the facing 985s.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112B) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to either one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. Further, in the intermediate plate 983b, the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 and the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Can be switched to the regulated state.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state in which a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught in the recess 985h, thereby hindering the flow of the game ball.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the outer end portion in the radial direction toward the intermediate plate 983b side. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, in the distribution unit 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985, and the magnetic body 988c is rotated around the through hole 983c to rotate the acting portion 983a in one or the other direction. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is the accommodating portion 983e1. It is possible to suppress getting out of. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the back base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion inside which accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above, and is set to an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating portion 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodating inside the accommodating portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to prevent the portion 986b from coming out.

The second recess 987b is provided with a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. When the magnetic body 988c provided repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. , The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from the state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to the state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state in which the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball, a third passage member 993 that is arranged on the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 arranged between the three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the second passage member 992 side with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the gravity direction (lower in the gravity direction). The second insertion hole 991b formed through the side), the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in the front view. It is mainly provided with through holes 991f which are formed through a plurality of circular holes.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passes through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passes through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in the front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. A sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the 922 and an erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 are mainly provided.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the upright wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end portion on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape so as to project in the horizontal direction and the tip thereof bends toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted into the engaging portion 992d while facing the erection wall 992a. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the erecting wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, around the sixth insertion hole 992c, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are positioning wall surfaces for arranging the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions facing the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular protrusion 992f projecting from the sixth passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular projection 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through substantially an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly provided with an erection wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). Will be done. As a result, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 114B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the erection wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the third passage member 993 is opened on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114 (b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the erection wall 992a by that amount. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the standing wall 993e, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the first wall portion 992c2 is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing fraud of the player, the inside of the detection hole SE1a is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. In the bent portion 993d1, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is provided with a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the through hole 993c1 is inserted from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to screw the screw into the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the above, a game that flows down the game area by exchanging the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. It can be a different game form without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is a figure. The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a back base 1985 arranged on the side opposite to the game area side of the front base 1981. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 is mainly provided with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (opposite the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (yellow in the present embodiment). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 is arranged or the exchange unit 1980 is arranged on the game board 13.

That is, when a game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having a specification in which the distribution unit 980 is arranged and a game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having a specification in which the replacement unit 1980 is arranged are introduced in the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification is used, so the color arrangements of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 are different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is used.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 due to the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size in which a game ball can be inserted. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out an upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball flowing in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. .. Further, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at a position in the gravity direction substantially the same as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown into the opening 985d in the order of flowing into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the rear base 1985 in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the distribution unit 980, and is communicated with the internal space of the opening 985d and the through hole 981c which are communicated with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982. It is formed with an opening of 985 g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in the front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, so that the distribution unit 980 to the exchange unit 1980 Can be easily replaced with (change of specifications).

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known. According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has the inflow port 982d and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d, and also has the game board 13. The winning opening unit 930 arranged on the front side and the winning opening unit 930 are arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the aisle unit 990 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. There is no need. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, when changing the specifications of the game board 13 while diverting (combining) the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940), the front surface of the game board 13 is used. Space can be used effectively.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the winning opening unit. At the same time, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 in the front view, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light transmitting material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate. , Attach the seal to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, it flows down the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the front unit 940. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light transmitting material) resin material, the front unit is formed. Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, the distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 having many passage paths for the game balls is changed to the exchange unit 1980 having few passage paths to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the flow passage. When changing from the distribution unit 980 in which two are formed to the exchange unit 1980 having one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be arranged by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the throwing passage TR0, when the distribution unit 980 is changed to the exchange unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Since it is installed, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices arranged in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for sending a game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the exchange unit 1980 is arranged in the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the exchange unit 1980 can be positioned by using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same. Therefore, by positioning the side wall portion 981b with respect to the rolling portion 943a, the replacement unit 1980 Even so, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to prevent a displacement (step) from occurring in the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as in the distribution unit 980. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CXIX-CXIX line of FIG. A01.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d have a second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in the second throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member having a first passage which is arranged on the front side of the game board and through which a game ball passes, and a first member which is communicated with the first passage of the first member. A game machine having two passages and a second member provided on the back side of the game board is known. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, after passing through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, the first 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are located between the projecting portions 962 g of the drive unit 960 facing each other. The wall 942d is inserted. When the throwing unit 970 is arranged on the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e on which the projecting portion 962 g is projected.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a protruding portion 962 g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. And. As a result, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located outside the pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposite direction. As a result, in the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b, the protruding portion 962g is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. Positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. Since (the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide portion 962b (arm portion 962e), as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b, The occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being arranged in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening portion for arranging the drive unit 960. That is, since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as the arranging space, the processing man-hours can be reduced accordingly. , Product cost can be reduced.

As described above, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged (formed so as to be able to hold) on the front unit 940 provided with the second throwing portion 942c, so that the front unit 940 and the front unit 940 and the back surface of the game board 13 are arranged. When each of the throwing units 970 is attached, it is not necessary to attach the drive unit 960 separately, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of mounting can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. To. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the work of engaging the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940, so that the base plate 60 can be engaged. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after simultaneously attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f and the front unit 940 The displacement member 966 described above is arranged between the back base 941 and the rear base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is inserted and the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960 can block the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 from the outside, and prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the protrusion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of wing members.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state of the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXX b of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in -CXXb line. Note that FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). To.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set so that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known. However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Further, as described above, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated from each other in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 120 (a)). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, a gap K1 in a space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the gaming ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second throwing portion The gap K2 in the space formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of the 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different from the rolling direction of the game ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that is rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a linear shape has been described, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment is formed on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction. It is provided with a recess 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 according to the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is arranged in the front unit 940, the second opening 966c has a second inner edge. 2 Winning openings 140 are arranged.

Further, the displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 122) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) To the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 122) with a bulging portion 966b.

The protrusion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and the recess 8966a6 extends outward in the lateral direction to the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b facing each other. Further, the side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (horizontal direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 becomes the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by abutting.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced from the recess 8966a6. Can be extracted from the inside of. As a result, the protrusion 945b and the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 can be brought into contact with each other to displace the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it can be regulated that the drive is transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 The protrusion 945b can be displaced by disengaging the engagement with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side (gravity direction) upper side in the gravity direction, the protrusion 945b can be received with the slide displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is accepted in the recess 8966a6 by utilizing the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 has been described. The tip of the is projected from the connecting hole 966b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

123 (a) and 123 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) correspond to FIG. 96 (a). Further, in FIG. 123 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123 (b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forced open) by the player to open from the closed state. The engaged state during displacement to is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 9965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion 965b which is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the seventh embodiment, the tip portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 9965a projects from the connecting side of the insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a setting portion 965f.

The outer shape of the insertion portion 9965e in front view is formed to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the insertion portion 9965e is arranged so as to be inserted through the inside of the connecting hole 966b1 and the end portion of the tip thereof is a connecting hole. It protrudes from 966b1. Further, the insertion portion 9966e bulges from the engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from the connecting hole 966b1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with a bulge portion 965e1.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to project in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotation shaft 965c side is formed at a position where a slight gap is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other for transmission. The displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts on the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. .. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to the rotational displacement and is also displaced toward the rotation shaft 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. As a result, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also regulated.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is set to rotate before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are displaced. It is possible to suppress contact. Therefore, the transmission member 965 can be rotationally displaced to displace the displacement member 966.

As described above, the displacement member 966 is connected to the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other to regulate the rotation of the transmission member 9965. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and the displacement member 966 is displaced while the wing member 945 is closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the transmission member 10965 is inserted. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be described in small or s9.

124 (a) and 124 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 according to the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 10965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion that is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the seventh embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 10965a is projected from the connecting side of the insertion portion 10965e inserted into the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 described later and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a vertical portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. Further, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion protruding from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved about the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes a contact surface 10965e4 on a side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed so as to face the contact surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966 described later with a predetermined gap in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124 (a)) at a substantially central position in the front view. The second opening 966c has a state in which the shape of the inner edge in front view is formed to be larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. Placed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

Further, the displacement member 10966 is formed on the opposite surface of the protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the bulging portion 966b protruding from the other end side in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side, and the bulging portion 966b. It mainly includes a recess 10966d to be recessed.

The recess 10966d is recessed so as to be connected to the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and the recessed portion 10966d1 is provided on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contacted surface 10966d1 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged so as to face each other. Further, the contacted surface 10966d1 is provided with an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inside the contacted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is the insertion portion in the front view in the state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the back surface side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other and the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Will be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 axes the rotation shaft 965c. When rotated to, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state in which the contact surface 10966d1 is slightly separated from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member. By rotating the 10965, the insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slidably displaced. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced in the open state.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1. As a result, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inward of the recess 10966d while the displacement member 10966 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced in the open state and the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced with the slide displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back surface side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contact surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contact portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e (bulging portion) is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3. When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the 965e1) is in contact, the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without being rotated. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly coast guarded from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966 of the engaging portion 10965e3. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 according to the eleventh embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 according to the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b is formed with the first tooth surface 11942b1 of the gear tooth surface on the opposite side surface thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set so that the separation distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the displacement member 11966 between the facing surfaces. Is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with the first gear GY1 pivotally supported by the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. As a result, the displacement member 11966 can be slidably displaced to rotate the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1.

The displacement member 11966 is axial to the first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, the second member 11968 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and the first member 11967. It is formed with a first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 is formed with a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 11967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that are projected in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is projected toward the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. As a result, the first gear GY1 can be supported by the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is projected toward the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. As a result, the second member 11968 can be arranged on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially gate shape in the front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) and a second member thereof. 2 A sliding groove 11968b formed through a long hole in the plate thickness direction along the extending direction of the tooth surface 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126 (a)) and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the portal shape. A blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction is provided on an end face that extends to the surface.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and the first gear is The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion thereof is located on the inner surface of the second throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. , Arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length that abuts on the back surface side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to substantially the same position as the tip position of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade portion, and 11968c.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is changed to the rolling portion 943a. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and protruded by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is opened, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, so that the second member 11968 is displaced. The amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount twice as much as the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140. It can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is opened, it is possible to allow the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 1966 is slidably displaced from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. ), The other end of the thread is operated (pulled out and pulled) to reciprocate the game ball, so that the detection device SE4 detects it a plurality of times. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the eleventh embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 1966 (second member 11968) is slidably displaced and the blade portion 11968c crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c is inserted in the middle of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. When the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being displaced together with the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the blade portion 11968c The thread can be cut between the rolling portion 943a and the edge of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged from the second winning opening 140 on the rolling passage of the game ball has been described, but the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 according to the twelfth embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the protruding distances of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where the protrusion tip surface abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. To.

Further, on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 projecting toward the displacement member 12966 are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into the shafts of the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting from one end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposite side surface in the opposite direction. The distance dimension between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. As a result, the first member 12967 can be arranged between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a second member 12966 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, and a shaft support on the back base 941. It is mainly provided with a first gear GY1 that is meshed with the first member 12967 and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the back base 941 and meshed with the second member 12868.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface is formed by the first member 12967 and the second gear. It is geared to GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two gears having different sizes, and is formed by including a small diameter gear GY2a on the small diameter side and a large diameter gear GY2b on the large diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 to mesh the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b. The surface is meshed with the second member 12868.

The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 129666c is formed through at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. Further, the first member 12967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second opening 12966c and the second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction sandwiching 12966c, and third tooth surfaces 12966f on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge in the front view of the second opening 12966c is set to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12868 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 in a state where the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the pair of wing members 945 In the opened state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is projected from the second member 12966 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 12966b of the second member 12966. As a result, the second member 12966 can be arranged on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, whereby the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12868 is formed of a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body in a front view, and is arranged in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). Further, the second member 12868 is provided along the second tooth surface 12868a of the gear tooth surface and the extension direction of the second tooth surface 12966a (vertical direction in FIG. 128A) on the outer side of the pair of extension portions in the opposite direction. A sliding groove 12968b formed through a long hole in the plate thickness direction and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Will be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12966b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12966a, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12966 can be slid and displaced in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 is meshed with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12966a. Therefore, the rotation of the second gear GY2 causes the second member 12868 to be slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12868 can be displaced with the displacement of the first member 12967.

The slide displacement directions of the first member 12967 and the second member 12868 are set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12868 is set to be larger by the small diameter of the second gear GY2.

The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion thereof is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is placed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) than the inner surface. That is, the second member 12868 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 in the front view in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c cross the rolling passage of the game ball and rub the edges of each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made to move, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140. it can.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and is passed through the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling section 943a and the second throwing section 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball while the game ball reaches the detection position of. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the pair of blade members 945 open, the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is placed between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. It can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the second member 12868, when the wing member 945 is open, the blade portion 6683 is on the other side in the gravity direction from the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball in which the blade portion 6683 has entered the second winning opening 140. Be placed. As described above, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are open, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be passed between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, since the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 can block the rolling passage of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, the displacement distance of the second member 12966 is set to the eleventh. It can be less than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 is closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

Next, the drive unit 13960 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is transmitted via the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 The drive is transmitted from the solenoid to the wing member 945 by one member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), only the outer shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are set to open.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the thirteenth embodiment is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is gravity-driven. It is arranged in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 is erected from the base 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side and from the end of the base 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. It is formed with an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at an end portion on the opposite side of the engaging portion 13965j side. As a result, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction thereof.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position where it overlaps with the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the engaging portion 13965j is set so that its vertical dimension exceeds the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in the front view.

Further, a support portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shaped side view is projected from the engaging portion 13965j at the erection tip thereof. In the support portion 13965j1, the interfacing dimension inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum outer dimension of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposite direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 129 (a)) of the pair of engaging portions 13965j is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be arranged inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid and displaced in the gravity direction as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slid and displaced in the gravity direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced according to the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced in the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged on the back surface side of the plate member 951, so that the pair A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the arrangement space for the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, the space for arranging other members and devices is reduced to the pair of wing members 945 (second prize). It can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Next, the displacement member 14966 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in the front view has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the displacement A case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

130 (a) and 131 (a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the 14th embodiment. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of.

In addition, in FIG. 130A and FIG. 131A, the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut. The open state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the wing member 945 is opened is shown. Further, in the 14th embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the 2nd winning opening 140 than in the 7th embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the displacement member 14966 in the 14th embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in the front view, and has a second opening 966c at a substantially central position in the front view. It is formed through in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (b)).

The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130 (a)), and the longitudinal direction and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge shape set to be substantially square in the front view, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a))). , The other side contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90A)) is provided.

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3.

Further, the connecting hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2). The distance from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42-game ball). Diameter). As a result, when the displacement member 14966 falls on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction and the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the other side covering Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side is contacted. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). -Since the diameter of the game ball), the displacement member 14966 can be freely dropped, so that the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked by the edge portion of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the 14th embodiment, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are not communicated with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), the displacement member 14966 Since a part of the above is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is the side wall. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a figure. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

First, the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed in a box shape and is arranged so as to face the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, and the first accommodating portion 15962. A solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the second accommodating portions 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 connected to the above.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 132 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). It is provided with a guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in the space between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and are arranged to face each other, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 are mainly provided. Will be done.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). It is provided with a guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference).

The guide portion 15962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a lateral view and the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a front view gate shape and the wall portion thereof. A projecting portion 962g projecting from 962f on the opposite side of the lining portion 962a (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125)) and a pair of arm portions 15962e located on the other side in the gravity direction and projecting from the wall portion 962f. The second arm portion 15962j to be formed and the third arm portion 15962h projecting from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f interposed therebetween are mainly formed.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the arm portion 15962e is set at a protruding position in the gravity direction below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width dimension between the pair of facing arms 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second arm portion 15962j is set so that the distance dimension in the gravity direction is smaller than the dimension between the side wall portions 981b of the distribution unit 980 and the opposite sides in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the pair of second arm portions 15962j are set so that the distance dimension on the outer side in the facing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b in the horizontal direction. As a result, when the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is arranged in the winning opening unit 930, the second arm portion 15962j can be arranged inside the side wall portion 981b for positioning.

The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing portions of the arm portions 15962e. Further, the third arm portion 15962h is formed with a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the back surface base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

In the projecting portion 15962h1, the projecting distance from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the back surface base 941 (see FIG. 85) side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

Therefore, since the upstream ends of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing and side surface of the game ball passing through the step on the bottom surface side. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. It becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the 16th embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 16th embodiment has the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 mounted on the base plate, and the standing tip surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed so as to be in contact with the tip end portion of the second throwing portion 16942c of the 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed portion 16981b2 that is recessed on the erection base end side on the erection tip surface. The recessed portion 16981b2 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and the concave shape thereof is the lateral view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 16942c described later in the side view. Is set to be almost the same as.

As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the standing base end side is formed so as to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball colliding with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. Can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up and bouncing on the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to project from the projecting tip surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in the side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when a game ball that rolls on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is sent to the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched inside. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flowing down) of the game ball from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end portion of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different from the timing of passing through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the 16th embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side. Therefore, the side downstream end and rolling of the second throwing portion 942c. The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. That is, when the side upstream end of the second throwing portion 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end of the rolling portion 943a, the side surface upstream of the side wall portion 16981b. Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing unit 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the 16th embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, so that when the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the side surface are different in the passing direction of the game ball, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the side surface side The timing of passing through the step can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball flows down (passes) smoothly by that amount. be able to.

Further, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a The displacement of the distribution unit 980 upward in the direction of gravity can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball to be able to regulate that the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is displaced upward in the direction of gravity from the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when the protrusions 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the ends of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in the side view. However, in the 17th embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed so as to be inclined in the side view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the 17th embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 17th embodiment is formed so that the tip surface 17981b3 of the erection tip thereof is inclined downward from the proximal end side to the distal end side. .. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed so as to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed so that the tip surface 17942c3 of the projecting tip surface is ascended and inclined along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b described above in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. (7th embodiment), the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a recessed portion 16981b2 as in the 16th embodiment, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. It can be improved.

Next, the displacement member 18966 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second. It is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the 18th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 135 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a).

Note that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b) and 137 (b), only a pair of wing members 945, a back base 941, a front base 943, a displacement member 18966, a transmission member 19958 and a solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Displacement.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135A) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that bends in a substantially L shape in the rear view, and extends from the non-transmission portion 189666a6 extending in the gravity direction and the non-transmission portion 189666a6 from the lower end portion in the gravity direction. It is provided with a transmission unit 18966a7 that is bent and extended to the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the through hole 966c1 is arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, it is possible to regulate the flow of the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896 g that inclines toward the front side toward the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second throwing portion 942c. That is, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed in the rear view, the blade portion 1896 g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the 18th embodiment, the rotation range on the tip portion 965a side is set larger when the solenoid 961 is driven, as compared with the 1st embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896 g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning is made inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view. The opening of the mouth 140 can be arranged.

Further, when the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. The sliding inside the sliding groove 18966a of the protrusion 945b is slid inside the transmission portion 18966a7 after the protrusion 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6. In this case, since the extension direction of the non-transmission portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b is changed with respect to the back surface base 942 when sliding the non-transmission portion 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6 without being displaced. On the other hand, when the protrusion 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members is opened, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing members 945 are rotated by the protrusions 945b of the wing members 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966 g is arranged below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion. Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, the second prize is won between the blade portion 18966g and the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c as the blade is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. It is possible to cut the urging object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140.

That is, the displacement member 18966 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position where the pair of blade members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of blade members 945 are closed. Since it is provided with a blade portion of 18966 g that rubs against the edge of the passage (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is illegally inserted into the passage through which the game ball is placed from the second winning opening 140. You can cut the force.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. With the game ball reaching (see), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the eighteenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 18966 is slidably displaced and the blade portion 18966g crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced and rolled together with the blade portion 18966g. When 18966g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, the 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c The thread can be cut between the edges of the. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is urged by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) to the solenoid 961 in a direction in which the tip portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 is forcibly released due to a player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly released as well. As a result, the cheating of the player can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is not limited, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the openings formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of a light transmissive material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member is not necessarily limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are formed of a layer of a non-transparent material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transmissive material can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game region from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a layer of a non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or is between the layer of the non-transparent material and the layer of the permeable material. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear members 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected by the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or the pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a seal of a member having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 (for example, silver foil or aluminum) is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance. Printing (for example, white color) may be performed.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sealing or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or the pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When a sticker is attached, the sticker may be attached so as to protrude toward the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is inserted between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be provided as an intermediary.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened. Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance can prevent light emitted by another device in the game region from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from another device is emitted from the projection plate. It is possible to prevent a pattern or a pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 when it is incident on the member 3620.

In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, and the like. It may be a leaf spring. Examples of the mounting method include a mode in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the protrusion 850 is mounted between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member. The 850 may slide-displace the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction is changed as in the first embodiment. Since it can be a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion and the displacement velocity can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case as well, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is projected. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). One of the light emitted by the LED 651 by arranging the surfaces on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 irradiates other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and is obliquely irradiated from the irradiation surface of the LED 651. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used for both the light for displaying the pattern or the pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating another irradiated body.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620 and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the back side, and the light emitted at the arrangement position of the LED 651 in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is projected plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be a position to be irradiated on the side end face. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in the front view circular shape. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the front side, and the light emitted at the arrangement position of the LED 651 in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Further, the LED 651 is arranged in a state where the light irradiation surface is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. The light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the above may be a position where the side end faces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated.

In addition, the LED 651 is arranged so that the light irradiation surface is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is applied to the front portion 632 of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the back portion 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right of the projection plate member 5620 is displayed on the projection plate member. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 due to the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection portion 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the unit is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second region and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns of the patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LED651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third regions are irradiated (for example, on the upper portion). The arranged light source incidents light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side incidents from the left end surface to irradiate the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side illuminates the right end. It is possible to irradiate the third region by injecting it from a surface), but there is a problem that a plurality of light sources need to be arranged and the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two regions, one is to irradiate the second or third region and the other is to irradiate the first region. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced by that amount, and it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the newly arranged drive motor and rotated.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, so that the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The amount of light emitted from the front of the can be partially increased or decreased. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced, and the shading of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. The case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664)) may be arranged in a manner in which two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern or pattern of each projection plate member 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and display patterns of the patterns, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the central side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 to form the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

Further, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when the light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape in the rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in the rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved shape, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2 to cause the inner wall and the protrusion of the sliding groove 966a2. The gap between the 945b and the 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes easier to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966 to form an inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945. The gap with the protrusion 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extending length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lightening amount due to the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2 and improve the rigidity of the displacement member 966.

In the seventh embodiment, the screw screwed into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is brought out from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is pulled inside the main body.

In this case, the displacement member 11966, 12966 is inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. The illegal object (thread) can be cut by using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is arranged in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Therefore, the case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an extended state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed of two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a displacement larger than that of the first member 11967. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member to increase the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 facing each other is formed so as to project in an annular shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by laterally shifting (side-sliding) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) in the lateral direction (direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction).

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not necessarily limited to this. A sticker that displays information consisting of characters or figures may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front) side of the throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930). ), Even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized, the position of the distribution unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). The form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be printing with ink or forming two colors.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a vehicle and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism is the driving force of the driving means. A rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member and a slide member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and a projecting portion is projected from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion is projected. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that a sliding groove through which the installation portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other are formed vertically at predetermined intervals, and a protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is the outer shape of the protruding portion (thick). If it is equivalent to (1), the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and is a slide member or a pair. A projecting portion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove does not incline with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be the same as the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. .. As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted protruding portion is slidable along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is omitted with respect to the wing member. It can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be set to a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member, the extending length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the slide member can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is slid displacement upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the position of the projecting portion at the time of starting is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, since the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation to, the inertial force increases by the amount that the weight of the slide member is added, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when opening or closing the wing member in the stopped state by starting the driving.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protrusion when the member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. As for the displacement component of the portion, the horizontal component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be reduced (minimized). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

The game machine A5 is characterized in that when the slide member starts a slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction, so that the weight of the wing member is increased. It can be rotated by (own weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started to be driven and opened.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and gravity. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the direction is formed.

According to the game machine A6, in either the game machine A4 or A5, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the axis of rotation and is inclined with respect to the plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity, even when the position of the protrusion is set downward along the direction of gravity of the axis of gravity of the wing member. , The projecting portion can be guided along the inclined direction of the inclined surface, and the slide displacement of the slide member in the upward direction of gravity can be smoothly started.

Further, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only the gap between the inner wall and the protruding portion can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion due to the contact of the protruding portion with the inclined surface. In addition to the gravitational displacement of the installation, horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member in the stopped state of being opened or closed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open posture or the closed posture even when it is affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine A7, the game machine A8 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion when the slide member is slidably displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member (own weight). ) Can be used to facilitate the maintenance of the protruding part being accepted by the receiving part.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the slide displacement direction are separated by a predetermined interval. The wing member is provided with a contact portion on the other side to which the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion, and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that at least the other side contact portion is in contact with the other side. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the direction of slide displacement with the one-sided abutted portion. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-sided contacted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side to cause wings. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair. A projecting portion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. In order to open the wing member, which is arranged so as to face the one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of the slide displacement. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the other side to be contacted, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is provided. The slide member is disengaged from the slide member, and the slide member is slid and displaced from the state in which the wing member is closed to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. Then, the gaming machine A10 characterized in that the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the direction of slide displacement with the one-sided contacted portion. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-sided contacted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side to cause wings. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide-displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. The shape is complicated because it is necessary to form the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be released.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said A game machine A11 characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A10, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine A12 is characterized by comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A11, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the ball, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter the ball from the entry port, and the ball is passed through the passage of the passage member. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part is the passage member. When rubbed against the edge portion, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge portion of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes. The gaming machine A13 is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges against each other.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A11, when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of the wing members cross each other. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be rubbed against each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter the ball from the entry port, and the ball is passed through the passage of the passage member. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide members (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine A12 or A13, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A14 game machine characterized by.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A12 or A13, the displacement of the wing member from the opening position to the closing position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the sliding member is said to be the same when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted and the one-sided contacted portion. A game characterized in that the other side contacted portion is provided with the other side contacted portion, and the one side contacted portion and the other side contacted portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. Machine A15.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion and the sliding member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with. A pair of wing members and rotation are provided because the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding the slide member and opening or closing the pair of wing members as the rotating member rotates. When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and also to the rotating member at two places, it rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the posture of the slide member with the member are unacceptable, and resistance occurs when the slide member is slid-displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), which hinders the opening or closing of the wing member. .. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is connected to the rotating member at one place, it is one of the pair of wing members. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member.

It should be noted that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in the state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And, it means a position on a virtual line along the direction of slide displacement.

In the game machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect of the game machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion, so that a pair. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the attitude of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member. It is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion. This is because the above-mentioned tolerance for posture change can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
The first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the second ball entry port. In a gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are the second opening / closing member. A game machine B1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, the first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the first (2) A gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a ball inlet and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the space, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, they are placed on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entry port). Space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is made into the first opening / closing member (first entry). It can be secured on the back of the ball mouth), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the total front projection area of the first drive means and the second drive means.

According to the game machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. Since it is made larger than the total front projected area of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the game machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are on the back side of the second entry port. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means enter the second ball. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back surface side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, the drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and the drive shaft, and the main body. The drive unit accommodated in the unit and the wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit are provided, and the first drive means and the second drive means use the drive shaft as the second drive shaft. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture toward an opening / closing member.

According to the game machine B5, in any of the game machines B1 to B4, the first drive means and the second drive means are a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. A drive unit that drives the drive unit and is housed in the main body unit, and a wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit provide a drive shaft. Since the two are arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily combined.

In the game machine B5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body are arranged. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface excluding the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces other than the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged. Is different in output, and even when the sizes of the main bodies of the two are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step. It becomes necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means and another area (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and is between the two areas. It is a barrier made of a conductor for limiting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed as, for example, a metal plate material.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the first passage member forming the passage of the game ball entered into the first entrance and the passage of the game ball entered into the second entrance are provided. A second passage member to be formed and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member are provided, and the first opening / closing member rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and includes the first passage member and the second passage, which are pivotally supported and include a pair of wing members that open or close the entrance. The gaming machine B7 includes a rotating member arranged between the members and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. Since it is provided with a rotating member arranged in the above and a sliding member that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members as the rotating member rotates, it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. Further, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the first passage member toward the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, so that the first ball entry port should be brought closer to the second ball entry port by that amount. Can be done.

In the game machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine B8 comprising a portion, wherein the first portion is formed by being bent in a substantially shape in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and the rotating member is extended from the rotating shaft and driven first. A second portion driven by the means is provided, and the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of rotation axis, so that the first driving means can be used while securing the slide amount of the slide member. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) of the first portion is connected from the rotating shaft to the slide member in the present invention. When the linear distance to the portion is set to be equal to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. .. On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is used. The distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the slide amount of the slide member becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide member can be slid while the first driving means and the slide can be slid. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the game machine B8, the game machine B9 is characterized in that the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first part which is opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member to reduce the size as a whole.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second entry port is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member and the first driving means. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that it is arranged between the two.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor for detecting the game ball entering the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor opens and closes the second. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first driving means from the second entry port, a part of the detection sensor makes the first Since the driving means can be hidden, such cheating can be made difficult.

In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of the detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be detected. In the present invention in which the first opening / closing member is arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even if the second opening / closing member is opened and an illegality is applied to the first driving means from the second entry port. By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the location where the fraud is applied becomes invisible. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

In the game machine B10, a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member are provided, a pair of the detection sensors are arranged, and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first drive means from the second entry port, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. Therefore, such a gap (between the pair of detection sensors facing each other). By setting the screw member at the fastening position, the unshielded area in front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult.

The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and may be used to fasten and fix the two members, or may be used to fasten and fix another member to the case member. good. Further, the screw member is preferably made of metal.

In the game machine B11, the game machine B12 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. Therefore, for example, the second opening / closing member is opened to enter the second position. When fraud is applied to the first driving means from the ball mouth, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the wiring is damaged due to the fraudulent act. It can be easily (broken). Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

In the game machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effect of the game machine B12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to cheat the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

In the game machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. Game machine B14 to play.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effect of the game machine B12 or B13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Since it is formed, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (break) the wiring by shifting the position (side slip) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the.

In any of the game machines B12 to B14, the game machine B15 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the game machine B15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to cheat the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
The game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and having the above-mentioned In a game machine provided with a second member arranged on the back side of the game board, a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member. A game machine C1 comprising a third member having and.

Here, a game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. There is known a game machine having a second member and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, after passing through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, the first 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, a third member having a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member is provided. Can be used to position the second member with respect to the first member.

In the game machine C1, the game board is provided with an opening in which an opening is formed and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in an internal space. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the third member is arranged in the internal space of the portion.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the game board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in the internal space. Since the third member is arranged in the internal space of the opening, it is not necessary to separately provide the opening for arranging the third member. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arrangement space for the third member, the processing man-hours are reduced and the product cost is reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the third member engages the first engaging portion with the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion with the second passage of the second member. A game machine C3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine C3, in the game machine C1 or C2, the first engaging portion of the third member is in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion is in the second passage of the second member. Since they are engaged, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (the first). Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is effective as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the game machine C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that a part of an inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be made easier to tolerate.

A game machine C5, wherein in any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that the first member and the second member are formed on the front and back surfaces of the game board. When each member is attached, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine C5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the game machine C6 is characterized in that the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. ..

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, it is not necessary to separately perform the work of engaging the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A game machine C7 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the first member and the third member to the game board at the same time and then attaching the second member to the back surface of the game board, the third member can be attached at the same time as the mounting operation. 2 The engaging portion can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member to be fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third member is attached to the fixing member. A game machine C8, wherein the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed or integrally formed on the fixing member, the first member can hold (arrange) the third member at the same time as the work of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first member is formed so that the game ball can enter the ball, and rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port and the entry port communicating with the first passage. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and the driving force of the driving means are the pair of wings. The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the members, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism is a pair of a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pair that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, it is on the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage as compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine C9, the slide member includes a projecting portion in which the pair of wing members project toward the slide member, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the third member includes a concealed surface portion facing an opening on the side opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C9, a pair of wing members are provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted into the sliding portion. Since the slide member is provided with the moving groove and the third member is provided with the lining surface portion facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding member is slid by the lining surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of wing members.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entry opening, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered in the entry opening is rolled, and its rolling. A game machine D1 comprising a passage member into which a game ball that has rolled on a surface flows in, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the entry port are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The entry port is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entry opening are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member even when the entrance is enlarged. Length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened accordingly, and the passage member can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine D1 includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry port, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is provided at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. The gaming machine D3, which is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball which is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guiding means is provided in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is disposed between the side end portion and the passage member, when the game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the entry port, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member to prevent it from staying at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D3 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. ..

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member is provided. Therefore, the rolling surface can accept the game ball that rolls in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

In the game machine D4, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the guide groove is extended linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the length of the rolling surface. The game ball that rolls in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) to the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the guide groove, It is possible to guide the game balls to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In any of the game machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region in which the first guiding means is arranged so as to sandwich the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine D7, wherein the second region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is arranged. Since the second region on the opposite side of the first region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region, a game ball that has entered the second region or a game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region. Can be swiftly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward inclination of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine D7 is characterized in that the game machine D7 includes a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7, since the second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D7 or D8, a game that is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and rolls the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine D9 is provided with a second guiding means formed so as to guide the ball to the entrance side.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7 or D8, it is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is set in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. Since the second guiding means is provided so that the game ball rolled along the ball can be guided to the entrance side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the game machine D9 when the ball entrance is opened.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the ball when the entrance is open. , The game ball guided to the entrance side by the second guiding means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry port as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward a side surface portion opposite to the first guiding means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is separated from the entrance as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. As it is tilted in the direction, its upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball quickly flows into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the entrance. Can be made to.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region toward the passage member, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are from the entrance. Since the risk of jumping out to the outside is low, by contacting the side edge of the second guiding means and guiding it to the ball entry side, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region. It can be suppressed and flowed into the passage member faster by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to get over the upper surface of the second guiding means and guide it to the first region (first guiding means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing the ball from popping out from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means extended in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The size of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is made larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine D12.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is made larger than the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means, the game ball that has passed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In the game machine D11 or D12, the game machine D13 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effect of the game machine D11 or D12, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means, so that the upper surface of the second guide means is included. The game ball that has overcome the above can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guide means to reliably decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines D8 to D13, the game machine D14 is characterized in that the second guide means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D8 to D13, the second guide means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction, so that the first guide means is located. Even when the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the above is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the second guide means. , It is possible to decelerate, and it is possible to easily position it in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The game machine D14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member, and the second guide means is provided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. The game machine D15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effect of the game machine D14, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member is provided, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When it is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact (collision) with the second guide means. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated, can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines D1 to D15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member is provided, and the groove width of the guide groove is widened. The gaming machine D16, which is characterized in that it becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the game machine D16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a game machine provided with an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the entry port, and a game board on which the entry unit is arranged. An opening is formed in the game board in the plate thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. A first unit to be provided and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board are provided. A game machine E1 characterized by.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. Since one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and being arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board are provided, the front surface of the game board is provided. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passage) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting (combining) the game board, the game board You can effectively use the space in front of.

In the game machine E1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. A game machine E2 characterized in that it is arranged at overlapping positions.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is formed in a front view. Since it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board is formed from plywood or a sticker is attached to the game board. Since it is permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that it flows down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit. The game ball to be played can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion overlapping the second passage of the second unit is formed of the light transmitting material in the front view. This is because the flow of the game ball can be visually recognized to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light-transmitting material.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light-transmitting material, so that through the first unit. When the second unit is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine E4, the game machine E5 is characterized in that information composed of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of display modes include printing with ink, sticking of stickers, and two-color molding.

In any of the game machines E1 to E5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage. And a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. A second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed are provided. The game machine E6 is characterized in that detection sensors for detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the game machine E6, in any of the game machines E1 to E5, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. The second upstream unit and the second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and forming a plurality of second connecting passages are provided, and the passage of a game ball is detected in the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensors are arranged, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having a smaller number of second branch passages to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, the number of detection sensors arranged is increased. It is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passage, the detection sensors can be arranged as many as the number of the second connecting passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is provided. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to arrange one detection sensor, but only for the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that the detection sensor will be arranged. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

In the game machine E6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A game machine E7 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and the ball is entered into the second entry port. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the first unit and the third passage of the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by the combination.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Is directly or indirectly engaged to position the second unit with respect to the first unit, so that positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so that the second passage is relative to the first passage. Or the third passages are directly or indirectly engaged with each other for positioning, so that even a separate unit can be positioned with respect to the first unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the misalignment (as compared with the case of positioning other parts) The occurrence of steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In any of the game machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is projected toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding detection sensor is projected. The gaming machine E9, characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by engaging the detection sensor with the receiving portion. While making it possible to do this, it is possible to suppress the part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole.

In the game machines E1 to E6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. However, in the second unit, the gaming machine E10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of the game machines E1 to E9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. Since it is formed in, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front surface to the back surface of the second unit, and the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend at the bent portion. The game machine E11 is characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the ground, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is formed. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion in the portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, by erecting the erecting portion from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bending of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve the durability, and the game ball is moved along the erecting tip of the erecting portion. While it is possible to guide the bent portion to flow down smoothly, the standing portion is located in front of the game ball in front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing portion and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a gaming machine provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member in which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The game machine F1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ..

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , The timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end, so that the game ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side on which the game ball is affected can be surely made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and it is possible to easily disperse the influence, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes). ) Can be made.

In the game machine F1 or F2, among the downstream ends of the first passage member, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member is provided with a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface, and the second passage member is the upstream end thereof. The gaming machine F3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the wall and receives the protruding piece, and a portion of the protruding piece facing the protruding tip is provided as an upstream end of the side wall.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the first passage member is projected from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is the side downstream end. The second passage member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the upstream end thereof to receive the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the game machine F3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side (bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the game machine F3, since the game machine protruding piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the first The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it, so that the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member). Also, the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball is likely to be hindered as compared with the step) in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position. Therefore, as in the game machine F3, the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member can be regulated at a position where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

In the game machine F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. Compared with the case where the game ball is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In the game machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, as compared with the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. You can make it harder to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In this case, according to the game machine F5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where it is formed in a shape (stepped shape) having protruding pieces or recesses, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed for molding. It is possible to improve the sex.

In the game machines F4 and F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4 or F5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passage direction of the game machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pressed toward the bottom surface. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced up at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that, when displaced, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry opening, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball. When the pair of wing members is opened by the driving means to be driven and the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wings are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry port, and the pair of wings are arranged by the driving force of the driving means. There is known a gaming machine provided with a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for restricting the entry of a game ball into a ball entry port when a member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when a pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can be entered. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate the entry of balls.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, for example, the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position after the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when a pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. In a state where a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sling member when the slide member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. , The gaming machine G2 characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine G2, the game machine G3 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate the slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine G2 or G3, the game machine G4 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2 or G3, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion, and thus the weight of the slide member. By using (own weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion.

In the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the one side contacted portion is provided. One side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the slide member, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least until the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side to be contacted, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion slides. When the slide member is disengaged from the member and the slide member is slidably displaced from the state in which the wing member is closed to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. The gaming machine G6, characterized in that the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide-displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. The shape is complicated because it is necessary to form the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be released.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said The gaming machine G7, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G6, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a ball and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball inserted into the ball entry port. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a passage member forming the passage, and a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread is in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the game ball multiple times by operating (drawing and pulling) the other end of the ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball and the detection sensor detects it a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts caused by the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times.

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member and the slide member to rub against the edge of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. A game machine H2 characterized by having a rubbing portion.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member is the passage member. Since it is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. A game machine H3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, a pair of wing members cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. Since the transmission mechanism includes a cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide members (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine H2 or H3, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine H4 characterized by.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a game machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. The gaming machine I1 is provided with the emission increasing means for increasing the emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiating means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmitting member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to see, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The position of forming the reflection portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means is irradiated to the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected on the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member is correspondingly increased. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be increased, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, when another device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and incident light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I2, the game machine I3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively, so that among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, the light transmitting member The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and is emitted to the front side and the light that is emitted to the back side of the light transmitting member are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved accordingly.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even when the light emitted by another device in the game area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I2 or I3, the game machine I4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , The overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) can be reflected to facilitate the incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved accordingly.

In any of the game machines I2 to I4, the game machine I5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I5, in the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine I4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or totally reflected) at the boundary with and, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines I2 to I5, the game machine I6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I6, in the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indexes of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine I5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or totally reflected) at the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines I2 to I6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine I7 characterized by including a driving means.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in a ring shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. Therefore, by rotationally driving the pinion gear by the drive means, the pinion gear is rotationally driven. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member also has a role of concentrating the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and a role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines I2 to I7, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in a ring shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably supported by a shaft, or may be fixed so as not to be rotatable. In this case, as a form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which the fixed support ring slides along the guide groove.

Further, in the game machine I8 subordinate to the game machine I7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the front side or the back side, respectively. That is, since the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and can be incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the opposite space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A game machine I9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect of the game machine I8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are opposed to each other. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiation surface. The gaming machine I10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated by the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front or the back of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The featured game machine J1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (Ab.). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective portion, while applying a plurality of light emitting means to an irradiation surface on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member by arranging the light emitting means so as to surround the circumference of the target member (unknown at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each of them has a different orientation), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in an elastically deformed predetermined posture. Since the base member is provided, at least two or more light emitting means can be arranged by arranging one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The game machine J1 is characterized in that the game machine J1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , Warping and bending of the substrate member can be suppressed, and the posture of the substrate member can be easily defined. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the game machine J2, the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be more easily maintained.

In the game machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A game machine J4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastic. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the game machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member opposite to the target member. A game machine J5 characterized in that it is arranged on the back surface.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the board member.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw can be brought into contact with the member to prevent the movable member from being brought into contact with the light emitting means and damaged.

In the game machine J6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because the light emitting means can be easily brought into contact with the head of the screw by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the game machines J2 to J7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is provided on the other side of the base body or the block body. A game machine J8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines J2 to J7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the base body or the other side of the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member and the block bodies are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the game machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a recess on the side surface disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess on the block body. A game machine J9 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine J9, in any of the game machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess on the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member arranged on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state where the base member is disposed in the form of being displaced in the direction and the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine K1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A gaming machine is known that produces an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes people visually recognize is performed. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member is centered on this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be regarded as a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the game machine K1, the displacement member is formed in such a form that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine K2.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The game machine K2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2, the transmission means is rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are provided. When a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to a force is performed on a displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine K3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction of connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction of connecting the members, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the pushing and pulling directions. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the game machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is closer to the central side range. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position than the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member. , When the displacement member is made to perform a reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the game machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A game machine K6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of the game machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since the range is set, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an overhang position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the game machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The game machine K7.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being arranged at the position, the rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed by the action of the dead center described above, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the game machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the members and the connecting members and on the side opposite to the connecting positions of the displacement members and the base members with the connecting positions of the rotating members and the connecting members interposed therebetween. Game machine K8.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , When the displacement member rattles against the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, since the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant, so that the player can produce a surprising effect. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the first. 2 Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the game machine L1, the first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and the second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. The gaming machine L2 is provided with a second member driven by the displacement member, and the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the first member which is displaceably arranged on the base member and is driven by the first driving means and the first member which is slidably displaceable on the base member. The first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine L2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation centers the same and different in the rotation directions, but forming them in different rotation directions and different rotation centers. Therefore, it is possible to greatly change the displacement mode of the displacement member, and it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

In the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin protruding from the is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed according to whether or not the second member is linearly displaced. it can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member which are displaced in a curved shape. A rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized, for example, to simplify its structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the game machine L3, the game machine L4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so that the first driving means or the second In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine L4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one in which the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the unexpected effect of the player.

In the game machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A game machine L5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of the game machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It has become possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines L1 to L5, a second displacement member displaceable is provided on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement member is displaced. While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Game machine L6.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L5, a second displacement member displaceable is provided on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceable between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a light-transmitting portion made of a light-transmitting material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that the mode visually recognized by the player is not changed so much that it is difficult to have an interest.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both. The mode that the player visually recognizes can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member to be irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples thereof include forms to be used and forms in which these are combined.

The game machine M2 is characterized in that the game machine M1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine M3 characterized by.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacement of the target member, the player can visually recognize different parts of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflection portion is visible through the opening, and a second group different from the first group are openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible through the first position, by arranging the target member in the first position, the target member is placed through the opening of the shielding member by the first group. The first pattern or pattern to be formed is made visible to the player, while the target member is displaced from the first position to the second position so that the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern through the opening of the shielding member. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine M4 to play.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, the target member is formed in a front view circular shape or an annular shape, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the rotation center. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the game machine M2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in a circular plate shape in a front view and is formed with a reflecting portion, and emits light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from a side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member, which is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M6, the target member is formed of a light transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating the light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or the pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in the rotated state. it can.

In the game machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of the game machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The game machine M7 is characterized in that the game machine M1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. Therefore, by combining the displacements of both, the target member by the light irradiation means can be used. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, the mode in which the player visually recognizes can be further changed, and the player can easily have an interest.

The game machine M7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect of the game machine M7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are brought into contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacement of the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displace the light irradiation means. it can.

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A game machine K1 in any of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and In any of M1 to M8, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and In any one of M1 to M8, the gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 60 Base board (game board)
60a through hole (opening)
64 1st prize opening (1st passage)
140 2nd winning opening (entry entrance, 1st entrance)
65a Specified winning opening (second entry opening)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 bogie member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 protruding member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L lower left rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488R Lower right rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488b drive pin (connecting pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base member 611, 5611, 6612 Back base (base member)
612,5612 Front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 Reflector 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Grooving member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Board member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 Second block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Protruding part 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (driving means)
940 Front unit (1st member, 1st unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second throwing part (part of the first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of the first passage member)
945 wing member (first opening / closing member)
945b protrusion (protruding part)
951 Plate member (second opening / closing member, opening / closing member)
953a1 opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Circular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Protruding part (second guiding means)
954c2 Side side 954c3 Side edge 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 2nd guide surface (1st inclined surface)
954d2 2nd side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed part (passage member)
957a1 Main body 957a2 Shaft (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm (2nd engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g protruding part (first engaging part)
140 2nd winning opening (entry entrance, 2nd entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of the first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Protruding part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966,8966,11966,12966,14966,18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of the first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (reception part)
966b2 One side contacted part 966b3 Other side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 2nd blade (part of cutting member)
6683 Blade (part of cutting member)
970 throwing unit (second unit)
980 distribution unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bent part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide section (standing section)
985e1,985f1 Inflow passage (second connecting passage)
900 aisle unit (second downstream unit)
991c1,991d1 Recessed part (accepting part)
TR0 throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of the 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of the 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detector (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw C collar (support wheel)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center side range)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotation and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-234009

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activities.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing fraudulent activities.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is rotatably supported by an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter and a position sandwiching the entry opening. A pair of wing members that open or close the wings, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members. A passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and a part of the transmission mechanism is a passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position. Cross the aisle.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of the rear base. It is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. It is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 34 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit in the line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 44 (b). (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block on the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit at the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view. , FIG. 56 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove in the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove in the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. FIG. 64A is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64A, and FIG. 64B is a projection plate of the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65A. It is sectional drawing of the member, the gear member and the groove forming member, and (c) is the sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. It is a front view of the game board in 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a ball throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. .. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit in line XCVIII-XCVIII of FIG. 97. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the specific winning opening unit in line CII-CII of FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is the specific winning opening unit and the specific winning opening unit in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the drive unit. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the sorting unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIX-CXIX line of FIG. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in 8th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the drive unit according to the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the displacement member in the tenth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit according to the fifteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 17th embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the eighteenth embodiment as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a cross-sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a sphere. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when it is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a player wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (expanded state) makes it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481,491,661,880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. The states in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively in the internal space of the back case 300. It is housed in order.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a front view frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L displaceable on the base member 410, a right displacement member 420R, and the like. A retracted position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the back side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, a third symbol display device). It can be displaced from the overhanging position on the front side of 81) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, it is possible to make the displacement mode of the displacement member different (form a plurality of types of displacement modes). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 is projected by a front view ring-shaped base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. A plurality of LEDs 651 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is displayed as a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 651 incident on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Can be clearly highlighted). Further, a structure that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is adopted. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a back base 830 arranged at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the overhanging position extending to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the overhanging position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP around the balance position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) that is displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) driving means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower drive is provided. When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive) is driven. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in different modes. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that produce an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are included in the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. , Left driven member 430L and right driven member 430R, carriage member 440, and upper left rack 450L and upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a slide formed at the lower end. It is provided with a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to a length dimension in which the tip protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 ( It is slidably inserted into (see FIGS. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted into the connecting shaft 441. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative posture change (rotation around the axis of the connecting hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and the drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted. .. Therefore, in either case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connecting hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 projecting from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is provided with two connecting shafts 441 arranged side by side in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by rolling the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is supported in a state of being suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted. It is provided with a rack gear 452.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, since the configurations are substantially the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the rack gear 452 is engraved in front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, the formed portion of the connecting hole 451 is offset to the front side, and the upper left rack 450R is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, both rack gears 452 are meshed with pinion gears 459 that are rotatably supported by the base member 410.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the raising cover 413 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 is a drive in which the first drive motor 481, the pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and the pinion gear 482 are meshed with each other. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the first gear 487a is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the gear 487e at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back surface of the left front cover 411L. The cover. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and their shafts. It is provided with a drive pin 484c projecting from the front at an end opposite to the side on which the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 to the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 484a as the center of rotation, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rail arranged in front of the base member 410, the tip rail arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and the base end rail and the tip rail. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is used as a base. It is moved up and down in the vertical direction with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) are in the state where the leading gear 487a is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front surface and the right front surface of the base member 410. It is rotatably supported between the cover and the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by moving the protruding member 485 up and down, the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated by utilizing the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and the rack gear 488a is engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the drive pin 488b is projected from the front at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. And each are provided. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and in a state where the rack gears 488a face each other, they are located between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 in the left-right direction (width direction). , FIG. 19 left and right direction) and slidably held.

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through the opening 410b formed in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) are rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gears 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to rotate with each other. It can be linearly moved in opposite directions (directions in which they are close to each other or separated from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L is as described above. It is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, for ease of understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 is a drive in which the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 are meshed with each other. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The upper portion (upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape in front view) of the base member 410 is formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially overlapped on the front side. Will be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of an upwardly protruding portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 protruding from the back of the overhanging portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and the like. It includes a shaft support hole 494a and a linear drive groove 494c located at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 494b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is moved from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494a as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced to the left or right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced to the left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L becomes the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the line, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls is formed on the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first aspect of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first aspect, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost side (the position where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and The protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowermost position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, they are shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 after passing through the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) toward each other and the projecting member 485 is raised until the state (extending position in the first aspect). In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are united (a state in which the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is a sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the above, the protruding member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear motion) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction close to each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. It acts on 421. As a result, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linear motion) in a direction closer to the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side (the displacement amount on the lower end side). That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially at the same time from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhang position (overhang position in the first aspect). The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach (see FIGS. 23 and 24) substantially at the same time. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (dolly member 440) is faster than that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving means of 1, and as in the present embodiment, 2 It was possible for the first time to use the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (bogie member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are improved. be able to.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions to those described above, FIGS. 21 and 22 show. After passing through the states shown, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) until the states (retracted positions) shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 are separated from each other, and the protruding member 485. Is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the overhanging positions in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (in the state of being arranged in the retracted position), the left displacement member 420L of the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates on the upper end side (axis center of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, it is allowed that the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L slides along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 is shown. When the 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third aspect of displacementing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhanging positions in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is permissible for member 420R to be lifted upwards.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), the drive arm is as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce a surprising effect of the player.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). As a result, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to produce a surprising effect of the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by translation (linear motion), while the second aspect. And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the motion form of the displacement is different. Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In this case, in the conventional product, there are some products in which the center of rotation remains constant and the displacement mode is changed by changing only the rotation direction, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are , Not only the rotation direction is different in the same rotation center, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also different (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect is The lower end side is the center of rotation), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) can be greatly changed in the displacement mode, which makes it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

Further, in the first aspect, where the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form in which rotation and translation (linear motion) are combined, the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. It is the same direction as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced in the proximity direction, and distinguish between them. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is raised as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the proximity direction, whereas in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction close to each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first aspect. You can expect the player to do that.

In the displacement unit 400, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are respectively arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged on the bogie member 440. The upper end side (connecting hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are rotatably connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first aspect) including a rotational component and rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required (). That is, in the case of a curved locus, not only a mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the bogie member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It will be necessary to provide the 488L and 488R with a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a straight line direction, and therefore the bogie member 440 may be guided by a rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize the rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in any of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common, and specifically, One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each mode, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a front view ring-shaped base member 610, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably arranged on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to be transmitted to the projection plate member 620. The gear train (gears 662 to 664) of the above is mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the back base 611 and the facing surfaces of the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the region inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “display region”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the region outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side is transmitted to the player to visually recognize the projection plate member 620 and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a manner of forming a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in the front view and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is meshed. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction with the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641, the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 651) for injecting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposites the outer peripheral surface). A plurality of (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of each LED 651 in the irradiation direction passes through the substantially center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the back side of the back surface base 611, and the gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back base 611 has an inner standing portion and 611a erected on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and an outer standing portion erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An intermediate erection part 611b erected between the erection part 611c, the inner erection part 611a and the outer erection part 611c, and an inner concave groove in an area surrounded by the inner erection part 611b and the inner erection part 611a. Mainly provided with 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation protrusion 611f projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected on the front side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611c is erected on the front side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by being divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

The inner concave groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. Is formed.

The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed by surrounding the ring-shaped plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. To.

The regulation protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axial center of the collar C. At the same time, a protrusion is formed on the front side. In the present embodiment, the regulation protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611a, the intermediate standing portion 611b, the outer standing portion 611c, and the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611 are supported. The erection portion 612a, the intermediate erection portion 612b, the outer erection portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are overlapped with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulation protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected in the area on the back surface of the front base 612 between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and allows the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XXXVI of FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 on the standing tip side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch 611b1 is formed at a position in phase with the notch 612b1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state where the erection tip surfaces of the intermediate erection portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), a substantially circular opening in front view is formed by the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2. To. These circular openings are formed at positions (positions having the same phase) facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650.

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the notches 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Will be done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The notch portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by notching a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a linear direction perpendicular to the radial direction. Will be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a pattern, a pattern, or the like over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in the front view. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed of an annular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is inclined from the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the back surface portion 632 on the back surface side, and the end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 to the front side. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is meshed as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined to the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is a virtual angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back portion 632 extending the back portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1 = θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view, and the cross section is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape, and the bent inside is formed. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from an end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38), and has a constant facing distance around the plane and the axis of the projection plate member 620 on the front side. Formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that abuts on the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and its cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed in a circular shape around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can be arranged on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and is inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is a virtual angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 extending the front portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3 = θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) to 40 (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. Note that FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) show transition states when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, in FIGS. 39 and 40, a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side (FIG. 3) of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (b) lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is from the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C even if the groove forming member 640 is displaced. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the color C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, in the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f, the axis of the collar C is the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 40 (a)) with the back side (upper side of FIG. 40 (a)) of the shaft of the shaft portion 612f. It is done in a state of being inclined to. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. As a result, the axis of the color C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)) so that the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collars. There was a problem that the assembly efficiency was poor because it was necessary to arrange the collars and both hands were used for the assembly.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the collar C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by lining the back base 611 from the back side on the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41 (a) to 43 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the cross-sectional line is not shown for easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 41 (b), 42 (b) and 43 (b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is the present invention. Considering that it does not affect the invention, the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced by incident on the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 is also emitted from the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the side of the back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge portion of the projection plate member 620.

That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, it is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, since the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body and light is incident from its end face (edge), the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident on the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, the refractive index of air is a value sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), so that the air travels inside the projection plate member 620. Light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Will be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light-transmitting material, and thus is irradiated. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel as well as the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and be emitted to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the thickness of the projection plate member 620 can be changed, or the intensity of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 (light intensity) can be increased without increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 is emitted. The amount of light can be increased to make the pattern or pattern stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is such that the groove forming member 640 is in the front direction with the light source A (on FIG. 42 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. Since the positions are shifted in the direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle β and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β can be transmitted to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and is advanced to the axial side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can be incident not only on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is such that the gear member 630 is in the back direction with the light source A (downward in FIG. 43A) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount of the misaligned arrangement. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the above-mentioned state (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted to the irradiation angle γ can be emitted. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLIVb of FIG. 44 (a). 45 (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (b) is an irradiation unit 650 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 44 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 is provided on a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in each of the present embodiments) first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged.

The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a horizontally long strip shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting means for irradiating light for incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the front surface of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (FIG. 44 (b) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. At the same time, the second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first block 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). Further, FIG. 46 (c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c).

The first block 653 has a front side (paper surface of FIG. 46 (a)) from a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the opposite side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by the connecting wall 653c, and the protrusion 653c1 is projected from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is located on the front side (front of the paper surface in FIG. 46 (c)) from the bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular front view and the side wall portion 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654a1 in front view is bored in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted therethrough.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by the connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 Can be fastened.

Insertion holes 653b1,654b1 are bored in the first block 653 and the second block 654 at two locations of the side wall portions 653b and 654b which are erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the arrangement positions of both blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and hold them at the arrangement positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to the first virtual surface (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and is symmetrical with respect to the second virtual plane that is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second first block 653 is arranged with respect to the first substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have both vertical and longitudinal directions with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is relative to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46C). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 of the second is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of one, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when assembling the second block 654 to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have both vertical directions with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability during the assembly work should be improved. Can be done.

It will be described back to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, respectively, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and a predetermined interval between the first block 653 and the second block 654. To.

Specifically, in the first block 653 and the second block 654, the front surface thereof is overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the open side thereof is arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 652 and 654 are provided with recesses on the side surface to be overlapped (arranged) on the substrate member 652, the electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652 are provided in the recesses (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and the connector from being damaged by the contact with the surrounding displaced members (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with surrounding displaced members (for example, projection plate member 620). it can. Further, the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) even in the portion where both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method of arranging (assembling method) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this way on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612, in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each holding pin 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. ..

As a result, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, by superimposing the front surface of the back surface base 611 on the back surface of the front surface base 612, the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, each LED 651 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650, but also the circumferential distance of the LED 651 between the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Will be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of such LED 651s being arranged (attached), each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 to a posture toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, which increases the labor of the arrangement work.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (8 in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed so as to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that the arrangement work of a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the labor of arranging the LED 651 can be reduced accordingly.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the back base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and only by inserting the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654, each LED651 Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the labor of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, vibration and the like occur. It is possible to suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input, or to correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in the front view). Will be set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be changed to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Further, since each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652, the substrate member 652 by both blocks 651 and 654. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction of FIGS. 44 and 45) of the substrate member 652. That is, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is formed in the connecting wall 654c in the second block 654, the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is increased accordingly. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b on which the fastening hole h is formed is on the side of the first block 653. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the longitudinal direction (FIGS. 44 and 45, left and right directions). ) Can be shortened to provide a space (a space is provided) between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening hole h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the influence of the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be made difficult to act on the LED 651, and the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself can be easily corrected in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations becomes large, the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b where the fastening hole h is formed, and the protrusion 653c1 projecting from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the substrate member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost, and the direction thereof can be further increased. It can be easier to maintain.

Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the outermost side in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, they are not constrained by the second block 654), such longitudinal direction. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front surface side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. Further, FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 is provided on the front base 830 having a rectangular shape in front view, the front base 820 superposed on the front side of the back base 830, and the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 to be arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. It mainly includes a connecting member 870 that connects the 860, the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear base 830 projects to the axial centers of the opening 831 formed so that the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes a shaft portion 832, 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 that protrudes to the front side and extends in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back surface side of the back surface base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the back base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 823 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, respectively, and are formed in a columnar shape on the front side from the back base 830.

The back side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the front side of the back base 830, and is a connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with an outer shape slightly larger than that of the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side of the paper surface to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge portion on the back surface side, and projects toward the back surface side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 to be formed, a front side regulating portion 824 extending to the back surface side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding to the back surface side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 in the front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap for arranging the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 described later between the back surface base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. As a result, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state between them.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion to which one end side (upper side of FIG. 48) of the urging spring SP, which will be described later, is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed to protrude on the back side of the front base 820.

The front side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the direction toward the front of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the back side of the front base 820, and is along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to the urging spring SP described later at a predetermined interval, and is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 to the back surface side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is applied to the transmission gears 863 via the transmission gears 861 and 862 by engaging the gears in series. Is transmitted to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a protruding portion 863c that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. Mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

The tooth portion 863a is a tooth mating surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is projected to the back surface side in a columnar shape, and the shaft is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed so as to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed by being curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of the position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed. It is formed so as to project radially outward on the side surface that is not used.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in the front view, and is formed in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end of FIG. 48). The gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and the contact formed so as to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. A unit 873 is provided.

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. As a result, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. As a result, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. Will be done.

Further, the width dimension of the tip of the contact portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance dimension between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 in between. .. Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (shaft support) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed in. As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, so that it can be prevented from falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the urging spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 to transmit the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed through the one end side end of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, with the pin member 890 inserted through the shaft hole 851, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840. , The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a state where it can rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end of FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position where the displacement member 850 projects from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side, and the protruding distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed up to a position that substantially coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and is lower than the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the position (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821, 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to the increase in the resistance at one place.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. Note that FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

Further, at the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b was connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotationally drive the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement of the connecting member 870 are displaced. The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when displaced from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead center), power is supplied to the drive motor 880. This is explained when is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863. At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP It is in a state where the force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be made to perform a reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be regarded as a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement is different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the embodiment, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and the structure and control can be adjusted. Since there is no need to complicate the product, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is a rotational displacement about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 is released from the transmission mechanism 860, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is released. When the displacement member 850 is subjected to a reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction. The displacement can be a combination of a rotational motion centered on the shaft hole 851. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is rotated with the push and pull. Since the posture of the 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and it is possible to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 Since the straight line connecting the axes and the straight line connecting the axes of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are located at substantially orthogonal positions, the force in the pushing-pull direction is applied. The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the equilibrium position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed. Can be easily continued.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged downward. , The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

In the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axes of the hole 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. In addition, in FIGS. 57A to 57C, a part of the transmission gear 863 (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57A, at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the back base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to facilitate the maintenance of the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is second. In the state of driving the drive range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the back base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance to displace the connecting member 870 is reduced. , The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the displacement member that is displaced vertically is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force for stopping the transmission gear 870 is the force stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and the force stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving the drive motor 880) is stopped. It can be dispersed into one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. Note that FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c) show the transition state from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the first position to the second position As the displacement to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced in accordance with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position, so that the displacement member 850 is first. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, so that the stopped state is quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Can be formed, so that the resistance for displacement of the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the overhanging operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocated with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion is provided. The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c). 59 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55. FIG. 59 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Is placed in.

That is, the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape due to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is regulated.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are tilted in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

As a result, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is on a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with the axis of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles against the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, whereby the shaft of the transmission gear 863 The inclination of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. It is set to be the same as the outer diameter dimension of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection on the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light on a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view and has a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C inward, and the recessed width is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. Note that in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b) and 63 (b), the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at this time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front side and the back surface side of the projection plate member 2620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. As a result, the edge portion of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted by the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation that irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing), the light applied to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is emitted to the projection plate member 2620. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having an irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the back edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface at the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

That is, by denting the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by denting it on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the color C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the amount of the irradiation angle Δ being added. Therefore, the intensity (light intensity) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment have been described. , A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a projection taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640.

65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. 65 (a). It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65 (c) shows the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are formed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front surface. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and protrusions 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side are formed on the outer edge portion thereof.

The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the back side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge portion. Further, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the line of the virtual line F whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Will be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of the virtual line G whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. To.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is screwed through a concave groove 3635 formed on the side surface on the front side (upper side of FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and penetrating the groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. A stop hole 636 for use is provided.

The concave groove 3635 is a groove that is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of each stop hole 636. As a result, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64 (b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a circular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the concave groove 3645 which is recessed on the side surface on the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an opening 646 for screwing.

The concave groove 3645 is a groove that is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. As a result, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 come into contact with each other is the opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force thereof. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, it is possible to secure a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66B, as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the light having an irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axis center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily reached to the reflecting portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to make the pattern. And the design can be clearly highlighted.

On the other hand, the light emitted to an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first embodiment. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the form.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and the light is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed from being incident. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display applied to the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Further, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when the light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the ground contact surface can be secured and the projection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted into the axial side of the projection plate member 3620 through the gap. There was a risk of light leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is caused by the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Further, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the size of the side surface of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light intensity) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. Further, FIG. 68A is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is attached to each head of the one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that cannot be contacted with the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By bringing it into contact with the head of S2, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the LED 651 from being damaged.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the parts can be relaxed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in the shape of a front view disk and is rotated around the center of the circle has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangle in front view. The case where it is formed in the above direction and is slidably displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged in a base member 5610 which is formed in a circular shape in a front view and has an open central portion thereof, and a slide displaceable portion in the opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and a projection plate member for driving force of the drive motor 661. A gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668) for transmitting to the 5620 is mainly provided.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in the front view, and is arranged in front of the back base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof and the back base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611. The front base 5612 is provided, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5) are provided in the internal space formed between the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in the front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on the outer edge portion on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view at the center portion. The central opening 5612h to be formed, the inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k formed so as to project from between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back surface side, and a sliding projection 5612 m formed to project from below the central opening portion 5612h to the back surface side. Rectangle.

The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 in front view. The player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding the rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 which is recessed on the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the protruding surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger than. Further, the pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging the holding portion covers 5628 provided with the above at both ends, the rod member 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion serving as a rotation shaft of the rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged at a position symmetrical with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side to the back side of the central opening 5612h. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is displayed as a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the opening at the center of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position invisible from the front side of the projected unit 5600 in the assembled state. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion thereof.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). There is, and it is formed in the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and is opened long in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. A detailed description of the operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) and a horizontally long rectangle facing the projection plate member 5620 across the rod member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is arranged.

The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. It is sandwiched between them and arranged on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 includes a groove portion 5626a recessed in the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimensions in the vertical direction and the front side are set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Will be done.

As a result, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed with respect to the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Further, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 with respect to the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 can be arranged so as not to protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and forms a groove in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to advance and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases as the thickness dimension is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 with the rod member 5625 arranged inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

Further, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off from the front base 5612, so that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668), and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is arranged with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is placed at the opposite position. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be incident on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 to make the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 stand out.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view is formed on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back surface side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. As a result, the rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting a protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

Rotating members 5670 are attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located on the center side in the left-right direction, and an irradiation unit on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k, and the front base. It is arranged at 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the back surface side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where it is arranged on the front base 5612. It is positioned and formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 with respect to the LED 651. As a result, the downward displacement of the rotating member 5670 on the one end side is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is the displacement regulating projection. It is possible to suppress being blocked by 5612j.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. In addition, in FIG. 74 and FIG. 76, the state in which the back base 5611 is removed is shown. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at substantially the central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening portion 5612h, the rotations arranged on both sides in the left-right direction. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides of FIG. 74 (a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the light of the LED 651 can be incidented accordingly. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right in the front view (see FIG. 73 and right), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side in the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction. As a result, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing up one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k which is the rotating axis. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653 in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to positions on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, if the LED arranged at another position is turned on according to the displacement to keep the light amount of the projection plate member constant, the displacement is determined. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the LED control becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the product cost can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced irradiated body (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiated bodies (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated body, the irradiation range of each irradiated body There is a problem that a part with a weak amount of light is formed between the two, and when the irradiated body is displaced, light and darkness is created, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of light and darkness due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be transferred to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive means for displacementing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base 5612 and then the wiring is connected, the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base, so that the process at the time of assembly can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced in the same manner to form the first state.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement regulating projection 5612j to regulate its rotation range.

The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is detailed because, as described above, the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are simply reversed left and right. The description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 is a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape in front view, and a projection plate member partially visibly arranged from an opening formed in the base member 6610. The 6620, the irradiation unit 650 that incidents light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, the drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for the purpose is mainly provided.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed on the facing surface between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an opening in which a front view ring-shaped shielding member 6612r is formed on the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. Part 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in the front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612r, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 and in the area between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c of the outer edge portion of the opening 6612p, and the back base 611 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612. By superimposing the front surfaces of the two bases, the two bases 611 and 612 are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space).

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in a ring shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the front base 6612 having a ring shape. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Since it is provided), it can be made difficult for the player to see, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. When the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to form a front base 6612. It is made visible to the player through the opening 6612p of. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside the projection plate member 6620. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc. are formed in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. To. In the present embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflecting portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflecting areas 6622a to 6622f of the six forms of the pattern or pattern are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, in the projection plate member 6620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662-664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is shown. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection region 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view (viewing from the back of the paper to the front). The reflection region 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns that emerge inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f, the player reflects the light. The display of the areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other areas can be seen, which impairs the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. As a result, a plurality of different patterns or patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated body is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible region (opening) of the irradiated body is used. From 6612p), the pattern or pattern switching of the irradiated body can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before the pattern or pattern switching is completed, so that the player can see the switching of the irradiated body. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Further, even if the power of the light source (LED651) that irradiates the irradiated body with light is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated body, the irradiated body is affected by the light of another device or a fluorescent lamp in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and pattern of the irradiated body could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is made difficult to see and becomes transparent. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern switching of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in the front view and is rotated around the center thereof, the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced as compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, if the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the arrangement space in the left-right or vertical direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern and the number of the projection plate member 6620 on the drawing side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns.

Next, the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in the winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, the left-right rear side of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the left-right direction, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or the rear side).

First, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 82, the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the base plate 60, a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 in front view, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front of the paper surface of FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and a specific winning opening unit 950 thereof. Mainly, the drive unit 960 arranged on the back surface (front side of the paper in FIG. 83B) of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 is other than the passage path of the game ball formed in the front unit 940 described later (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and specific winning opening 65a). It is possible to suppress the passage of the through hole 60a from the space.

A part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. Will be done. A detailed explanation of the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is arranged on the wing member 945 via the displacement member 966. Be connected. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In addition, in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. 87 (b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is arranged on the back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball 943. And two (pair) wing members 945, which are rotatably arranged between the back base 941 and the front base 943, are mainly provided.

The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while being formed in a substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is upside down. Further, the back base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and penetrates the base plate 60 through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The rear base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by notching on the flow side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87 (b)). b) Opposite to the specific winning opening 65a, which is located above) and is formed through a long rectangular shape in the horizontal direction, the second winning opening 140, which is formed through above the specific winning opening 65a, and the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at the side edge.

Further, the back surface base 941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through hole 941a has a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) toward the back side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) and the through hole 941a1 from the back side toward the front side. It is formed from a second through hole 941a2 that is reduced in diameter.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the tapping screw. Will be done. Further, since the first through hole 941a1 is formed by reducing the diameter from the front side to the back side as described above, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a projecting from the back surface of the back surface base 941 in a columnar shape is formed.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. To. As a result, the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state where the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

Further, since the second through hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the back surface side to the front surface side as described above, the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding toward the back surface of the back surface base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to prevent the screw head from coming into contact with the specific winning opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the back base 941 in the direction of gravity is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. A01) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge portion of the notch bottom portion (the upper edge portion in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () The game ball that has not flowed into any of them can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87B)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941 g that protrudes toward the game area side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) and is formed in a cup shape, and a side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 (Fig. 87)). b) A first throwing portion 942 g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941 g is formed in a size capable of accepting one game ball inside. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941 g (first winning opening 64) can flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941 g can be thrown to the back side (first throwing portion 942 g side) via the first winning opening 64.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g faces the second winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))) from the upper ends of both ends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is provided so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface on the side opposite to the game area (rear side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the flowing region from colliding with the first receiving portion 941g and damaging the first receiving portion 941g.

Further, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the game area becomes insufficient, so that the game ball It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be impaired, by colliding the game ball with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired. ..

Further, since the guide portion 941 g1 is formed so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941 g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally outward of the back base 941. As a result, the game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60 can be re-collised, and the flow direction of the game ball can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance dimension between the opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first throwing portion 942g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))), and the protruding tip side is the throwing unit described later. It comes into contact with the edge of the inflow port 982d of 970. As a result, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g to the first throwing portion 942 g via the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

The first throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which the upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942 g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in the front view, and the inner edge is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that is thrown between the opposite wings members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the second winning opening 140).

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall portion 941b projecting to the front side (game area side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper surface)) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87)) at its edge. (B) A second throwing portion 942c protruding from the paper surface front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The size of the front side wall portion 941b is set so that the protruding tip surface abuts on the throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second throwing portion 942c is formed by bending at both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140 in a substantially L-shape in the rear view. The size of the second throwing unit 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

In the pair of second throwing portions 942c, the distance dimension between the opposing surfaces in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction), and the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c, a second recessed portion 942c1 is formed by notching the protruding tip portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B)). The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which the protrusion 981b1 of the passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (upper side of FIG. 87 (b))) from the game area side of the back base 941 to the side opposite to the game area. A first shaft hole 941d recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and formed through the back base 941 and their respective parts. A protruding portion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b, which is located on the outer side of the two first openings 941e in the opposite direction and protrudes to the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Formed with and.

The first shaft hole 941d can support the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. As a result, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape about the center of the first shaft hole 941d. Further, the first opening 941e is capable of inserting the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protrusion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portions are located on a plane substantially the same as the central position between the facing portions of the wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed so as to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension thereof is set to be slightly larger than the facing distance dimension of the wing member 945 in the closed state. To. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of 966.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and are extended in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a long rectangular opening formed in the opposite direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87B) of the pair of wing members 945, and the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the back base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the circumference of the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite the game area), and recesses from the back side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided with a recess 941h to be provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the standing portion 942f.

The recess 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952, which is the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, is inserted in the state where the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (b). ) A second guide wall 942d protruding upward) is provided.

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, when the displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), the displacement member 966 and the back surface of the back base 941 are separated from each other. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is arranged between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 at the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The back base 941 is half toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) at the edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87 (b)) on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the specific winning opening 65a. A second out port 941f formed by notching in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the base plate 60, and is a game ball. It is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of.

Further, at the edge of the second out port 941f, a third throwing portion 942e formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view and projecting to the back surface side is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown to the back side via the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in the rear view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the back side. A detailed description of the game ball that rolls on the inner surface of the third throwing unit 942e will be described later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a projecting at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside in the front view. Further, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side (U-shaped open side) of the second receiving portion 943c. Further, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back surface base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown between the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. it can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c is a first concave portion recessed in a circular shape from the throwing guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof and the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). It includes 943ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

A pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87B) of the pair of wing members 945. Further, the pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end faces are brought into contact with each other. .. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the facing space of the pair of wing members 945 can be thrown between the facing surfaces of the ball throwing guide unit 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the back surface of the back base 941. It is projected to the side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. Can be thrown to.

Further, the front base 943 is provided with an annular protrusion 943b projecting in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b is provided with a second shaft hole 943b1 on the inner edge thereof, and the other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can flow into the back surface through the second out port 941f. The ball can be thrown to the side (opposite the game area).

Further, in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, the first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screws inserted in the second through hole 941a2 described above are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Will be done. As a result, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

The wing members 945 are arranged in pairs with the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 941 in between in the front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back surface base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate in a state where the wing member 945 can rotate. Can be placed between facing each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be displaced in a closed state in which the facing side surfaces are parallel to the gravity direction and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the facing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission portion that is connected to the displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the displacement member 966 is arranged at the tip thereof via the first opening 941e of the rear base 941. The size is set so as to project to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the back base 941. A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90B) at a substantially central position in the front view. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90 (a)), the longitudinal direction, and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90B) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. To be equipped.

The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 facing in the width direction and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed so as to bulge on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side), respectively. As a result, the area in which the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, come into contact with each other can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a long rectangular shape in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90 (a))). , The other side contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90A)) is provided.

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface on which the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, comes into contact. In the displacement member 966, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion 966b2 and being slidably displaced.

The other side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface on which the side surface of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, is in contact with the bulging portion 965e1. The displacement member 966 displaces the wing member 945 in a closed state (see FIG. 91) by abutting the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 against the other side contacted portion 966b3 and sliding displacement. Can be done.

Next, the connection state of the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). In addition, in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed parallel to the facing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (connecting hole 966b1 side) and abuts on the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 in an open state, and the lower inner surface 966a4 faces the lower inner surface 966a4 and the protrusions. The upper inner surface 966a3 that comes into contact with the 945b and displaces the wing member 945 in the closed state, and the lateral side of the displacement member 966 from the lateral side (left-right direction in FIG. 91) to the lower inner surface 966a4 side. It is provided with an inclined surface 966a5 which is inclined to.

The displacement member 966 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back surface base 941 by the transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 hits the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of wing members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at a predetermined interval are formed vertically, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The sliding groove 966a2 is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the protrusion 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945 and the sliding groove 966a2 through which the protrusion 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member 966 is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 does not tilt with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for arranging the displacement members in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is placed in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (other side in the direction of gravity), the inertial force increases by the amount of the weight of the displacement member 966 being added, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state is started to be driven and displaced to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the protrusions 945b are located on the lower side (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing members 945. Be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. As a result, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (own weight). Can be made to. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

Further, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5 to guide the displacement member. The slide displacement of the 966 toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) can be smoothly started.

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced accordingly. In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the gravitational direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can also be regulated by the contact of. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member 945 when it is in the closed state. That is, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is moved from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower part of FIG. 92). It is displaced to the side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 92). As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the own weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 has a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion 963 formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other, and a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion. The solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the 963s, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are pivotally supported and connected to the connecting member 964. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). It is provided with a guide portion 962b protruding from the reference).

The lining portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. Further, the lining portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in the direction facing the outside of the facing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging the engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be engaged. The workability of fastening with can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 in a state where the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is formed on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). It is provided with a through hole 962 da that penetrates toward it.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and has an inner diameter larger than that of the fastening hole 963b1. Is formed in. As a result, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view connected to the facing wall surface of the lining portion 962a and the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a front view gate type. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962 g projecting from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the lining portion 962a (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the dimension between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portion 962e on the tip end side (bending side), respectively, and the shape in front view thereof is formed to be larger than the shape in front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, in the wall portion 962f, the outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is the opposite direction of the pair of first guide walls 942 b of the back base 941 described above. It is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93A) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the standing portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (L5 = L6). As a result, the displacement member 966 can be arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be arranged between the facing portions.

The projecting portion 962g is formed so as to project from the outside of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposite direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) to the side opposite to the arm portion 962e, and the protruding dimension thereof is the rear base 941. It is set to be substantially the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the inner dimension L7 of the projecting portion 962g in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. It is set large. Further, the protrusion 962g is set so that the dimension in the direction of gravity is substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f facing each other.

As a result, when arranging the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the protruding portions 962g and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b. By inserting the projecting portion 962g between the standing portions 942f facing each other, the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged with respect to the rear base 941.

The second accommodating portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box shape that covers the other side (lower side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610. The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction (left-right direction in FIG. 93B) of the solenoid 610, which will be described later in the top view. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is located on the side of the first accommodating portion 962 from between the recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations. The engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, the protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)). ) Is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

The protruding portion 963b is formed so as to project outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. As a result, the screw inserted through the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 to fasten and fix the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side toward the first accommodating portion 962 and the tip thereof bends inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. To. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is formed. The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered on the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 has a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted inside the main body 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side opposite to the main body 961a of the shaft 961b. A ring portion 961c arranged at the end of the ring portion 961c and a coil spring SP1 arranged between the ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are provided.

The main body 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body 961a can be pulled inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the back surface base 941 side, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to protrude from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. As a result, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the back base 941 side from the other side in the gravity direction of the base portion 964a (FIG. 85). (See) Formed with an upright portion 964b that bends to the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 93B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. A first recessed portion 964c is provided, and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b is provided with an insertion hole 964e that penetrates in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protruding portion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The transmission member 965 is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a tip portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and a rotation extending to the connecting member 964 side while being connected to the tip portion 965a. It is formed from the portion 965b.

The rotating portion 965b is formed so that the width dimension of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is smaller than the dimension between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Will be done. Further, the rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) at the end on the 964 side, and the radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. It is provided with a protruding portion 965d that protrudes to one end side in the direction of gravity.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965c, the distance between the protruding tips is set to be larger than the distance between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. As a result, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and arranged inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable around the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in the top view. Further, the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). It is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion holes 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension of the rotating shaft 965c in the axial direction becomes smaller as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 965a includes an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the tip thereof, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Is formed with.

The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610. Further, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, a coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body 961a and the ring 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is extruded in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in the direction away from the main body 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96A) and the solenoid 610 side of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964. It is in a state of being in contact with the inner surface of the solenoid. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96A) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965 g in contact with the second accommodating portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is pulled into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought close to each other (rather than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction close to the main body portion 961a (on the right side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction close to the main body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 It is assumed that the inner surface of the solenoid 610 side and the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) are in contact with each other. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side (upper side in FIG. 96B) in the direction of gravity about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connecting portion between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b of the transmission member 965 coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, when the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963. Can be brought into contact. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is thick. Therefore, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965 becomes abnormal, it is possible to make it easier for the store operator to detect the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966 with the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, and is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. , The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set with the tip portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance of the rotating portion 965b is set to be substantially the same as the combined distance, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made the same as that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 increases. The whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, whereby the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which are opposite to the displacement member 966. As a result, the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling portion 943a (ball throwing unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 to reduce the overall size. Can be planned.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 98 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 98 (a)), FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (a) and As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are in contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is slid displacement to the other side in the gravity direction. Will be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning opening 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, the wing member 945 is opened by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the direction of gravity by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 arranged in the solenoid 610 as described above. It is displaced to the side (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98A, the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are brought into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is moved to one side in the direction of gravity. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, the wing member 945 is closed by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed while the power supply (supply) to the main body 961a is cut off, the main body 961a can be closed if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or due to a player's fraudulent act. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being opened and the game ball from easily flowing into the second winning opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by the connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced as the transmission member rotates. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When acted on, the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and also to the transmission member 965 at two places. If so, the change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 is difficult to tolerate, and the resistance when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated) is increased. It occurs and prevents the opening or closing of the wing members. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the pair of wing members is connected. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945s, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b (FIG. 98). It is set to be less than 3 times (see (a)). This makes it easier to tolerate a change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 Where the contact is easy and the change in posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted, the posture of the displacement member 966 is set by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. It is possible to prevent changes from being regulated. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a figure. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 has a ball-entry member 953 formed in a box-like body opened by the player side (front side of the paper in FIG. 99) and the opening of the ball-entry member 953. A plate member 951 arranged so as to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 sandwiched therein, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951 are provided. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed of a colored translucent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a shaft hole 951b formed in a cylindrical shape on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. It is formed to include a protrusion 951c protruding from one end toward the ball entry member 953, and an engaging portion 951d projecting from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the ball entry member 953.

The main body 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later in front view, and is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. ..

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side of the main body portion 951a in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953 by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 in a state of being inserted into the shaft hole 951b.

The protrusion 951c is formed so as to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game region side, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. A tip portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, in the engaging portion 951d, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the flow-down region side, so that the game ball flowing down into the main body portion 951a is the main body portion 951a. It is possible to suppress the fall from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the.

The ball entry member 953 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erection wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c projecting from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a in a ring shape, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d projecting from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding portion 953 g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a protrusion 953h protruding from the open side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951 side, and two locations penetrating the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a. It is formed with an inflow port of 953j.

The main body 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion having a size capable of inserting a game ball, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. It is formed with 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the standing portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the pair of wing members 945 described above on the outer side in the opposite direction. As a result, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of wing members 945, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

The inner edge of the opening 953a1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in the open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. it can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body portion 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The erection wall 953b is a wall for holding the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and surrounds the outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view in three directions. Formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the erection wall 953b. As a result, the detection device SE1 can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by the erection wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the erection wall 953b side at the tip portion separated from the base end side by the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f from engaging with each other and the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to the inflow port 953j described later, and can pass a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed so as to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and screws for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 are screwed into the inner edge portion thereof.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the distance dimension between the wall portions 953d is formed shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protruding dimension smaller than the recessing distance of the recess 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming off.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole for inserting a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955, which will be described later, into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. Will be done.

The projecting portion 953 g is formed so as to project on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are coaxially arranged and the protrusion The setting portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed so as to project toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge portion of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusions 953h are formed at substantially the same positions in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending the game ball flowing into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in pairs in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the ball entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the ball entry port. The machine is known. The entry port is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entry opening are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the ball entry port is enlarged, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member becomes longer. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inflow ports 953j are formed in pairs (at two locations) at predetermined intervals, so that even if the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a is enlarged, the inflow port 953j can be reached. The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j can be shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at the connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. As a result, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened and do not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity. That is, a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state are arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945). Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow down the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the inflow of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 is large. The inflow port 953j can be approached. As a result, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress over-winning of the game ball to the ball entry member 953.

The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in front view is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape in front view of the ball entry member 953 described above. Further, the passage member 955 includes a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, and a ball entry member 953 side located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side. A second opening 955b formed through the ball, a pair of third openings 955c formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion of the third opening 955c on the other side in the gravity direction. It is formed by including a rolling portion 955d to be provided and a second recessed portion 955f located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball through which the detection hole SE1a is inserted, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which the connecting member 957c and the transmission member 958 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that projects in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for arranging the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the gravity direction, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in the front view. .. As a result, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 is projected toward the ball entry member 953 in a state of being arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Further, an engaging portion 955e projects toward the drive unit 957 side at the edge portion of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inward of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is formed by being curved in an arc shape. Further, in the rolling portion 955d, the end portion on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning opening unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

As described above, the second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction of FIG. 99C) of the passage member 955 is the second of the drive unit 960 described above. It is set larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the accommodating portion 963.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955 g is formed in a columnar shape, and the fastening hole 955 g1 is recessed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950), and faces the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed at the position where it is. As a result, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed by including a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b covering the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c arranged at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a is a rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 957a1, a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and a side opposite to the main body portion 957a1 of the shaft portion 957a2. It is provided with an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end of the ring and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body 957a1 by the magnetism can be pulled inside the main body 957a1 and inserted. Will be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the passage member 955, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to project from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. Further, when the power supply (supply) is cut off after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box shape that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. Further, the case member 957b is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating the shaft portion 957a2 in the axial direction and an opening 957b2 penetrating the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip portion of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c is a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion thereof. A second recessed portion 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 are provided.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is arranged inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular lateral view. The transmission member 958 includes a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a that projects in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from an end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion that projects toward the plate member 951 side. Formed with 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. Further, the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is arranged by being inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. As a result, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CII-CII line of FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950.

It should be noted that FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a) show the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the open state of the plate member 951. Further, the closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is the main body of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state of being separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), in a state where the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the shaft portion 957a2 is a plate member due to the urging force of the coil spring SP2. It is in a state of protruding toward the 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)). As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is pushed out toward the plate member 951. As a result, the force is transmitted to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)) about the shaft hole 958b.

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. Is rotated to. As a result, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player illegally operates the plate member 951 side to forcibly open the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is pulled (adsorbed) inside the main body 957a1. It is said to be in a state of being. As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body portion 958a1 side is arranged with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. It is displaced to (right side in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction in which the tip portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102 (b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is rotated in the direction of As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the own weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. It is possible to suppress the force applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). Note that FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Further, in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the closed state of the plate member 951 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that inclines unilaterally in the gravity direction from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104 (a)) of the main body 953a. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c projecting at the connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and each surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an erection wall 954d erected in succession.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls a game ball flowing in between a pair of inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j side, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. .. As a result, the game ball flowing into the space opposite to the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (lower side in FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a to receive the gaming ball and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, it is different before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of the game ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104B). As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (horizontal direction in FIG. 104 (b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the accepted game ball is shortened to the passage member 955. It can be guided (inflowed) in time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b is set so that the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). As a result, when the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Is formed. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled toward the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is swiftly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951 and suppress the over-winning.

The erection wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. 2 The guide surface 954d1 is provided.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and is formed with the longitudinal end portion of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. As a result, the game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

The projecting portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and are projecting toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). .. That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, one surface is connected to a surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one surface of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side. Is formed by being connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the gaming ball (longitudinal outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the gaming ball. It is formed so as to be inclined to the side. As a result, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is increased, and the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a in the lateral direction, when the plate member 951 is in an open state, it is formed. The end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (on the gravity direction) side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body 951a.

Further, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. Can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is provided for the game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Since there is a low risk of jumping out from the outside, by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to suppress rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, it can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the guide surface 954c1 can be overcome and guided to the erection wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flowed into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before closing the opening 953a1 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c extends in a direction in which the side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the standing wall 954d is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erection wall 954d is extended in a direction in which the protruding portion 954c and the second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface on the opposite side are substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the side edge portion 954c3 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d to reliably decelerate and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Further, the erection wall 954d is set so that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the erection wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the rolling of the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c to decelerate. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

In the projecting portion 954c, the distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the recess 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in.

In addition, in FIGS. 105A and 105B, the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a operating the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83A) are connected to the solenoid 610 operating. A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83 (a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where the specific winning opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap with each other in the front view. Is formed in. As a result, a space can be formed on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the second winning opening 140 (pair of wing members 945).

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a A game machine including a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a and a second driving means for driving the plate member 951 is known. However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively, these pair of wing members 945 and the plate. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951 and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices are arranged. Space can be secured on the back surface of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged in the vicinity of the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is far from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) arranged in the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is the base plate. It can be retracted to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the 60 to make it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operation unit is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (evacuation), making it difficult for the player to see, and at the same time, the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 during movement (extension). ), Which makes it easier for the player to see, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged near the central opening is a specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By arranging the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, it is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of evacuation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (evacuation). As a result, when the movable body is operated to bring it into an overhanging state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 in the front view is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 provided with two displacement members (plate member 951 and a pair of wing members 945), the respective drive means (drive unit 957 and the drive unit 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is arranged, each drive means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back surface side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945). Space can be formed.

Further, the plate member 951 is specified because the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105A, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 105A). It is installed side by side along. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. A01) by the pair of wing members 945, and the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the pair of wing members 945. The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is arranged via the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is the back base. Since it is connected to 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (arranged) by the front base 943 at the same time as the action of fastening and fixing the back base 941 to the front base 943. As a result, when the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13), it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960.

In the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960, the positions of the ends on the opposite side (rear side) of the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950 are set to substantially the same position, and the drive unit is set. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end portion of the specific winning opening unit 950 opposite to the plate member 951 side (rear side). This makes it easier to organize the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being separated on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the game board 13, and it is possible to prevent the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged in a posture in which the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 are oriented in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the side opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957 can be easily combined.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. As a result, the shape of the partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged can be simplified.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or both sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step in the direction of gravity. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a barrier of a conductor for partitioning an arrangement region of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 and another region and limiting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

Further, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is located at the tip thereof (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the wing member 966 is arranged, the second prize is compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the back side of the mouth 140. Further, unlike the conventional product, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, it is not necessary to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950, so that the second winning opening unit 950 side. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in pairs with the specific winning opening unit 950 in the front view. Will be set up. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is fraudulently applied from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to detect the illegality. There was a risk of being done.

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden in the plate member 951 and the clerk cheats on the ball entry member 953. Is difficult to find.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, it is detected. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 is made to be the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to be able to detect fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1 because it is shielded from the screen and the location where fraud is applied becomes invisible.

Further, since the detection device SE1 is the same as the detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detects other game balls (off-the-shelf product), the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is secured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing devices SE1. Therefore, when the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the clerk cannot be notified of the player's fraudulent activity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 is damaged (broken wire) due to the fraudulent act. ) Can be made easier. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily suppress the fraudulent activity.

Further, an annular protrusion 953c for screwing a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and an error is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is screwed into the annular protrusion 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. By setting the fastening position of the above, the unshielded area in the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with screws, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult to perform.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound and arranged around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegal act is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such an illegal act can be made more difficult to perform. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c and arranged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a force in the shear direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction to detect it. A force in the shear direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, the wiring HS3 is connected to the detection device SE1 when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950. The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connecting portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position biased toward the end portion of the detection device SE1 on the side opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annular projection 953c) of the screw, so that the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such fraud can be made more difficult to perform.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 is a distribution unit 980 arranged on the player side (game area side) and provided with a space through which the game ball can be inserted, and the game area of the distribution unit 980. It is formed with a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side to the above.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the opposite side of the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, the game ball can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 is provided with a plurality of openings (first insertion holes 991a to second insertion holes 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 disposed on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. It is mainly provided with a distribution portion 983 arranged in a possible state and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution portion 983 on the back surface side of the back surface base 985.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a housing portion 986b and a protrusion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h. Formed in preparation.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109 (b)) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (FIG. 109 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the openings 985b and 985c. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are extended in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 in the space opening on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space opening on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. It is mainly provided with intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 that communicate with the passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3,985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, recessed portions 985f4 are formed which are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are formed so as to be connected to the spaces of the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 from increasing in length in the gravity direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990 described later in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the opening 985d. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be minutely large due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be arranged.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987, which will be described later, is inserted. By screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, the second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction. It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. ..

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982, which will be described later, sandwiched between the first guide walls 981f. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the open portion of the semicircle faces the substantially central side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (a)) along the edge portion thereof. Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the upright tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erection tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. The ball throwing passage TR0 is formed, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0 are provided. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. Further, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that is in the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Formed at overlapping positions.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting to the side opposite to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first throw from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1. The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side in the gravity direction of the portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown into the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g It can be difficult to get caught in between.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

In the erection wall 982a, the distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is set between the opposite sides. The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the passage can pass are formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the rear base 985, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983 described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized. ..

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is extended toward the back base 985 side toward one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, so that the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h and the recess 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected tip surface descends toward the back base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)). Be tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 to guide them toward the openings 985e and 985f. It can be easily flowed into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and is guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball at the opening 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 becomes difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portion 982h1,982j1 is erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is played by the thickness of the guide portion 982h1,982j1. There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily made visible even in the state of passing through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back surface base 985 side as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. The through hole 983c to be formed, the contact portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and the wall portion 983e formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back surface base 985 side. It is formed mainly with and.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, so that the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated while the distribution portion 983 is rotatable. It is arranged between the facing 985s.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112B) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to either one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. Further, in the intermediate plate 983b, the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 and the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Can be switched to the regulated state.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state in which a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught in the recess 985h, thereby hindering the flow of the game ball.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the outer end portion in the radial direction toward the intermediate plate 983b side. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, in the distribution unit 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985, and the magnetic body 988c is rotated around the through hole 983c to rotate the acting portion 983a in one or the other direction. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is the accommodating portion 983e1. It is possible to suppress getting out of. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the back base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion inside which accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above, and is set to an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating portion 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodating inside the accommodating portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to prevent the portion 986b from coming out.

The second recess 987b is provided with a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. When the magnetic body 988c provided repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. , The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from the state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to the state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state in which the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball, a third passage member 993 that is arranged on the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 arranged between the three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the second passage member 992 side with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the gravity direction (lower in the gravity direction). The second insertion hole 991b formed through the side), the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in the front view. It is mainly provided with through holes 991f which are formed through a plurality of circular holes.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passes through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passes through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in the front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. A sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the 922 and an erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 are mainly provided.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the upright wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end portion on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape so as to project in the horizontal direction and the tip thereof bends toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted into the engaging portion 992d while facing the erection wall 992a. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the erecting wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, around the sixth insertion hole 992c, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are positioning wall surfaces for arranging the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions facing the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular protrusion 992f projecting from the sixth passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular projection 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through substantially an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly provided with an erection wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). Will be done. As a result, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 114B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the erection wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the third passage member 993 is opened on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114 (b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the erection wall 992a by that amount. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the standing wall 993e, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the first wall portion 992c2 is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing fraud of the player, the inside of the detection hole SE1a is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. In the bent portion 993d1, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is provided with a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the through hole 993c1 is inserted from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to screw the screw into the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the above, a game that flows down the game area by exchanging the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. It can be a different game form without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is a figure. The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a back base 1985 arranged on the side opposite to the game area side of the front base 1981. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 is mainly provided with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (opposite the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (yellow in the present embodiment). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 is arranged or the exchange unit 1980 is arranged on the game board 13.

That is, when a game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having a specification in which the distribution unit 980 is arranged and a game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having a specification in which the replacement unit 1980 is arranged are introduced in the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification is used, so the color arrangements of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 are different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is used.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 due to the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size in which a game ball can be inserted. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out an upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball flowing in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. .. Further, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at a position in the gravity direction substantially the same as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown into the opening 985d in the order of flowing into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the rear base 1985 in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the distribution unit 980, and is communicated with the internal space of the opening 985d and the through hole 981c which are communicated with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982. It is formed with an opening of 985 g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in the front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, so that the distribution unit 980 to the exchange unit 1980 Can be easily replaced with (change of specifications).

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known. According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has the inflow port 982d and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d, and also has the game board 13. The winning opening unit 930 arranged on the front side and the winning opening unit 930 are arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the aisle unit 990 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. There is no need. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, when changing the specifications of the game board 13 while diverting (combining) the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940), the front surface of the game board 13 is used. Space can be used effectively.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the winning opening unit. At the same time, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 in the front view, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light transmitting material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate. , Attach the seal to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, it flows down the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the front unit 940. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light transmitting material) resin material, the front unit is formed. Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, the distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 having many passage paths for the game balls is changed to the exchange unit 1980 having few passage paths to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the flow passage. When changing from the distribution unit 980 in which two are formed to the exchange unit 1980 having one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be arranged by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the throwing passage TR0, when the distribution unit 980 is changed to the exchange unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Since it is installed, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices arranged in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for sending a game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the exchange unit 1980 is arranged in the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the exchange unit 1980 can be positioned by using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same. Therefore, by positioning the side wall portion 981b with respect to the rolling portion 943a, the replacement unit 1980 Even so, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to prevent a displacement (step) from occurring in the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as in the distribution unit 980. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CXIX-CXIX line of FIG. A01.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d have a second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in the second throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member having a first passage which is arranged on the front side of the game board and through which a game ball passes, and a first member which is communicated with the first passage of the first member. A game machine having two passages and a second member provided on the back side of the game board is known. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, after passing through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, the first 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are located between the projecting portions 962 g of the drive unit 960 facing each other. The wall 942d is inserted. When the throwing unit 970 is arranged on the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e on which the projecting portion 962 g is projected.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a protruding portion 962 g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. And. As a result, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located outside the pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposite direction. As a result, in the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b, the protruding portion 962g is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. Positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. Since (the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide portion 962b (arm portion 962e), as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b, The occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being arranged in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening portion for arranging the drive unit 960. That is, since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as the arranging space, the processing man-hours can be reduced accordingly. , Product cost can be reduced.

As described above, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged (formed so as to be able to hold) on the front unit 940 provided with the second throwing portion 942c, so that the front unit 940 and the front unit 940 and the back surface of the game board 13 are arranged. When each of the throwing units 970 is attached, it is not necessary to attach the drive unit 960 separately, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of mounting can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. To. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the work of engaging the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940, so that the base plate 60 can be engaged. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after simultaneously attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f and the front unit 940 The displacement member 966 described above is arranged between the back base 941 and the rear base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is inserted and the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960 can block the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 from the outside, and prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the protrusion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of wing members.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state of the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXX b of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in -CXXb line. Note that FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). To.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set so that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known. However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Further, as described above, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated from each other in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 120 (a)). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, a gap K1 in a space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the gaming ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second throwing portion The gap K2 in the space formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of the 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different from the rolling direction of the game ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that is rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a linear shape has been described, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment is formed on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction. It is provided with a recess 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 according to the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is arranged in the front unit 940, the second opening 966c has a second inner edge. 2 Winning openings 140 are arranged.

Further, the displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 122) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) To the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 122) with a bulging portion 966b.

The protrusion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and the recess 8966a6 extends outward in the lateral direction to the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b facing each other. Further, the side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (horizontal direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 becomes the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by abutting.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced from the recess 8966a6. Can be extracted from the inside of. As a result, the protrusion 945b and the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 can be brought into contact with each other to displace the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it can be regulated that the drive is transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 The protrusion 945b can be displaced by disengaging the engagement with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side (gravity direction) upper side in the gravity direction, the protrusion 945b can be received with the slide displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is accepted in the recess 8966a6 by utilizing the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 has been described. The tip of the is projected from the connecting hole 966b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

123 (a) and 123 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) correspond to FIG. 96 (a). Further, in FIG. 123 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123 (b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forced open) by the player to open from the closed state. The engaged state during displacement to is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 9965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion 965b which is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the seventh embodiment, the tip portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 9965a projects from the connecting side of the insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a setting portion 965f.

The outer shape of the insertion portion 9965e in front view is formed to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the insertion portion 9965e is arranged so as to be inserted through the inside of the connecting hole 966b1 and the end portion of the tip thereof is a connecting hole. It protrudes from 966b1. Further, the insertion portion 9966e bulges from the engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from the connecting hole 966b1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with a bulge portion 965e1.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to project in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotation shaft 965c side is formed at a position where a slight gap is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other for transmission. The displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts on the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. .. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to the rotational displacement and is also displaced toward the rotation shaft 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. As a result, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also regulated.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is set to rotate before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are displaced. It is possible to suppress contact. Therefore, the transmission member 965 can be rotationally displaced to displace the displacement member 966.

As described above, the displacement member 966 is connected to the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other to regulate the rotation of the transmission member 9965. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and the displacement member 966 is displaced while the wing member 945 is closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the transmission member 10965 is inserted. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be described in small or s9.

124 (a) and 124 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 according to the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 10965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion that is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the seventh embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 10965a is projected from the connecting side of the insertion portion 10965e inserted into the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 described later and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a vertical portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. Further, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion protruding from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved about the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes a contact surface 10965e4 on a side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed so as to face the contact surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966 described later with a predetermined gap in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124 (a)) at a substantially central position in the front view. The second opening 966c has a state in which the shape of the inner edge in front view is formed to be larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. Placed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

Further, the displacement member 10966 is formed on the opposite surface of the protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the bulging portion 966b protruding from the other end side in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side, and the bulging portion 966b. It mainly includes a recess 10966d to be recessed.

The recess 10966d is recessed so as to be connected to the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and the recessed portion 10966d1 is provided on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contacted surface 10966d1 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged so as to face each other. Further, the contacted surface 10966d1 is provided with an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inside the contacted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is the insertion portion in the front view in the state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the back surface side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other and the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Will be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 axes the rotation shaft 965c. When rotated to, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state in which the contact surface 10966d1 is slightly separated from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member. By rotating the 10965, the insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slidably displaced. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced in the open state.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1. As a result, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inward of the recess 10966d while the displacement member 10966 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced in the open state and the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced with the slide displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back surface side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contact surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contact portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e (bulging portion) is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3. When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the 965e1) is in contact, the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without being rotated. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly coast guarded from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966 of the engaging portion 10965e3. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 according to the eleventh embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 according to the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b is formed with the first tooth surface 11942b1 of the gear tooth surface on the opposite side surface thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set so that the separation distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the displacement member 11966 between the facing surfaces. Is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with the first gear GY1 pivotally supported by the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. As a result, the displacement member 11966 can be slidably displaced to rotate the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1.

The displacement member 11966 is axial to the first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, the second member 11968 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and the first member 11967. It is formed with a first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 is formed with a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 11967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that are projected in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is projected toward the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. As a result, the first gear GY1 can be supported by the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is projected toward the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. As a result, the second member 11968 can be arranged on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially gate shape in the front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) and a second member thereof. 2 A sliding groove 11968b formed through a long hole in the plate thickness direction along the extending direction of the tooth surface 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126 (a)) and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the portal shape. A blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction is provided on an end face that extends to the surface.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and the first gear is The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion thereof is located on the inner surface of the second throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. , Arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length that abuts on the back surface side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to substantially the same position as the tip position of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade portion, and 11968c.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is changed to the rolling portion 943a. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and protruded by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is opened, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, so that the second member 11968 is displaced. The amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount twice as much as the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140. It can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is opened, it is possible to allow the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 1966 is slidably displaced from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. ), The other end of the thread is operated (pulled out and pulled) to reciprocate the game ball, so that the detection device SE4 detects it a plurality of times. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the eleventh embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 1966 (second member 11968) is slidably displaced and the blade portion 11968c crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c is inserted in the middle of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. When the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being displaced together with the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the blade portion 11968c The thread can be cut between the rolling portion 943a and the edge of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged from the second winning opening 140 on the rolling passage of the game ball has been described, but the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 according to the twelfth embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the protruding distances of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where the protrusion tip surface abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. To.

Further, on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 projecting toward the displacement member 12966 are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into the shafts of the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting from one end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposite side surface in the opposite direction. The distance dimension between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. As a result, the first member 12967 can be arranged between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a second member 12966 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, and a shaft support on the back base 941. It is mainly provided with a first gear GY1 that is meshed with the first member 12967 and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the back base 941 and meshed with the second member 12868.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface is formed by the first member 12967 and the second gear. It is geared to GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two gears having different sizes, and is formed by including a small diameter gear GY2a on the small diameter side and a large diameter gear GY2b on the large diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 to mesh the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b. The surface is meshed with the second member 12868.

The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 129666c is formed through at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. Further, the first member 12967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second opening 12966c and the second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction sandwiching 12966c, and third tooth surfaces 12966f on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge in the front view of the second opening 12966c is set to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12868 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 in a state where the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the pair of wing members 945 In the opened state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is projected from the second member 12966 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 12966b of the second member 12966. As a result, the second member 12966 can be arranged on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, whereby the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12868 is formed of a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body in a front view, and is arranged in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). Further, the second member 12868 is provided along the second tooth surface 12868a of the gear tooth surface and the extension direction of the second tooth surface 12966a (vertical direction in FIG. 128A) on the outer side of the pair of extension portions in the opposite direction. A sliding groove 12968b formed through a long hole in the plate thickness direction and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Will be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12966b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12966a, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12966 can be slid and displaced in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 is meshed with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12966a. Therefore, the rotation of the second gear GY2 causes the second member 12868 to be slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12868 can be displaced with the displacement of the first member 12967.

The slide displacement directions of the first member 12967 and the second member 12868 are set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12868 is set to be larger by the small diameter of the second gear GY2.

The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion thereof is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is placed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) than the inner surface. That is, the second member 12868 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 in the front view in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c cross the rolling passage of the game ball and rub the edges of each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made to move, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140. it can.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and is passed through the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling section 943a and the second throwing section 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball while the game ball reaches the detection position of. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the pair of blade members 945 open, the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is placed between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. It can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the second member 12868, when the wing member 945 is open, the blade portion 6683 is on the other side in the gravity direction from the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball in which the blade portion 6683 has entered the second winning opening 140. Be placed. As described above, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are open, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be passed between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, since the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 can block the rolling passage of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, the displacement distance of the second member 12966 is set to the eleventh. It can be less than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 is closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

Next, the drive unit 13960 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is transmitted via the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 The drive is transmitted from the solenoid to the wing member 945 by one member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), only the outer shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are set to open.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the thirteenth embodiment is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is gravity-driven. It is arranged in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 is erected from the base 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side and from the end of the base 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. It is formed with an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at an end portion on the opposite side of the engaging portion 13965j side. As a result, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction thereof.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position where it overlaps with the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the engaging portion 13965j is set so that its vertical dimension exceeds the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in the front view.

Further, a support portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shaped side view is projected from the engaging portion 13965j at the erection tip thereof. In the support portion 13965j1, the interfacing dimension inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum outer dimension of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposite direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 129 (a)) of the pair of engaging portions 13965j is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be arranged inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid and displaced in the gravity direction as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slid and displaced in the gravity direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced according to the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced in the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged on the back surface side of the plate member 951, so that the pair A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the arrangement space for the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, the space for arranging other members and devices is reduced to the pair of wing members 945 (second prize). It can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Next, the displacement member 14966 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in the front view has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the displacement A case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

130 (a) and 131 (a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the 14th embodiment. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of.

In addition, in FIG. 130A and FIG. 131A, the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut. The open state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the wing member 945 is opened is shown. Further, in the 14th embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the 2nd winning opening 140 than in the 7th embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the displacement member 14966 in the 14th embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in the front view, and has a second opening 966c at a substantially central position in the front view. It is formed through in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (b)).

The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130 (a)), and the longitudinal direction and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge shape set to be substantially square in the front view, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a))). , The other side contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90A)) is provided.

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3.

Further, the connecting hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2). The distance from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42-game ball). Diameter). As a result, when the displacement member 14966 falls on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction and the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the other side covering Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side is contacted. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). -Since the diameter of the game ball), the displacement member 14966 can be freely dropped, so that the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked by the edge portion of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the 14th embodiment, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are not communicated with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), the displacement member 14966 Since a part of the above is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is the side wall. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a figure. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

First, the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed in a box shape and is arranged so as to face the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, and the first accommodating portion 15962. A solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the second accommodating portions 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 connected to the above.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 132 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). It is provided with a guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in the space between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and are arranged to face each other, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 are mainly provided. Will be done.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). It is provided with a guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference).

The guide portion 15962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a lateral view and the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a front view gate shape and the wall portion thereof. A projecting portion 962g projecting from 962f on the opposite side of the lining portion 962a (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125)) and a pair of arm portions 15962e located on the other side in the gravity direction and projecting from the wall portion 962f. The second arm portion 15962j to be formed and the third arm portion 15962h projecting from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f interposed therebetween are mainly formed.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the arm portion 15962e is set at a protruding position in the gravity direction below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width dimension between the pair of facing arms 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second arm portion 15962j is set so that the distance dimension in the gravity direction is smaller than the dimension between the side wall portions 981b of the distribution unit 980 and the opposite sides in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the pair of second arm portions 15962j are set so that the distance dimension on the outer side in the facing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b in the horizontal direction. As a result, when the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is arranged in the winning opening unit 930, the second arm portion 15962j can be arranged inside the side wall portion 981b for positioning.

The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing portions of the arm portions 15962e. Further, the third arm portion 15962h is formed with a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the back surface base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

In the projecting portion 15962h1, the projecting distance from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the back surface base 941 (see FIG. 85) side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

Therefore, since the upstream ends of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing and side surface of the game ball passing through the step on the bottom surface side. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. It becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the 16th embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 16th embodiment has the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 mounted on the base plate, and the standing tip surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed so as to be in contact with the tip end portion of the second throwing portion 16942c of the 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed portion 16981b2 that is recessed on the erection base end side on the erection tip surface. The recessed portion 16981b2 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and the concave shape thereof is the lateral view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 16942c described later in the side view. Is set to be almost the same as.

As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the standing base end side is formed so as to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball colliding with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. Can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up and bouncing on the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to project from the projecting tip surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in the side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when a game ball that rolls on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is sent to the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched inside. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flowing down) of the game ball from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end portion of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different from the timing of passing through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the 16th embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side. Therefore, the side downstream end and rolling of the second throwing portion 942c. The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. That is, when the side upstream end of the second throwing portion 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end of the rolling portion 943a, the side surface upstream of the side wall portion 16981b. Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing unit 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the 16th embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, so that when the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the side surface are different in the passing direction of the game ball, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the side surface side The timing of passing through the step can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball flows down (passes) smoothly by that amount. be able to.

Further, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a The displacement of the distribution unit 980 upward in the direction of gravity can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball to be able to regulate that the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is displaced upward in the direction of gravity from the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when the protrusions 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the ends of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in the side view. However, in the 17th embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed so as to be inclined in the side view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the 17th embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 17th embodiment is formed so that the tip surface 17981b3 of the erection tip thereof is inclined downward from the proximal end side to the distal end side. .. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed so as to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed so that the tip surface 17942c3 of the projecting tip surface is ascended and inclined along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b described above in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. (7th embodiment), the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a recessed portion 16981b2 as in the 16th embodiment, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. It can be improved.

Next, the displacement member 18966 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second. It is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the 18th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 135 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a).

Note that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b) and 137 (b), only a pair of wing members 945, a back base 941, a front base 943, a displacement member 18966, a transmission member 19958 and a solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Displacement.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135A) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that bends in a substantially L shape in the rear view, and extends from the non-transmission portion 189666a6 extending in the gravity direction and the non-transmission portion 189666a6 from the lower end portion in the gravity direction. It is provided with a transmission unit 18966a7 that is bent and extended to the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the through hole 966c1 is arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, it is possible to regulate the flow of the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896 g that inclines toward the front side toward the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second throwing portion 942c. That is, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed in the rear view, the blade portion 1896 g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the 18th embodiment, the rotation range on the tip portion 965a side is set larger when the solenoid 961 is driven, as compared with the 1st embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896 g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning is made inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view. The opening of the mouth 140 can be arranged.

Further, when the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. The sliding inside the sliding groove 18966a of the protrusion 945b is slid inside the transmission portion 18966a7 after the protrusion 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6. In this case, since the extension direction of the non-transmission portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b is changed with respect to the back surface base 942 when sliding the non-transmission portion 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6 without being displaced. On the other hand, when the protrusion 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members is opened, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing members 945 are rotated by the protrusions 945b of the wing members 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966 g is arranged below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion. Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, the second prize is won between the blade portion 18966g and the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c as the blade is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. It is possible to cut the urging object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140.

That is, the displacement member 18966 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position where the pair of blade members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of blade members 945 are closed. Since it is provided with a blade portion of 18966 g that rubs against the edge of the passage (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is illegally inserted into the passage through which the game ball is placed from the second winning opening 140. You can cut the force.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. With the game ball reaching (see), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the eighteenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 18966 is slidably displaced and the blade portion 18966g crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced and rolled together with the blade portion 18966g. When 18966g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, the 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c The thread can be cut between the edges of the. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is urged by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) to the solenoid 961 in a direction in which the tip portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 is forcibly released due to a player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly released as well. As a result, the cheating of the player can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is not limited, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the openings formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of a light transmissive material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member is not necessarily limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are formed of a layer of a non-transparent material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transmissive material can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game region from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a layer of a non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or is between the layer of the non-transparent material and the layer of the permeable material. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear members 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected by the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or the pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a seal of a member having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 (for example, silver foil or aluminum) is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance. Printing (for example, white color) may be performed.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sealing or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or the pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When a sticker is attached, the sticker may be attached so as to protrude toward the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is inserted between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be provided as an intermediary.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened. Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance can prevent light emitted by another device in the game region from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from another device is emitted from the projection plate. It is possible to prevent a pattern or a pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 when it is incident on the member 3620.

In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, and the like. It may be a leaf spring. Examples of the mounting method include a mode in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the protrusion 850 is mounted between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member. The 850 may slide-displace the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction is changed as in the first embodiment. Since it can be a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion and the displacement velocity can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case as well, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is projected. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). One of the light emitted by the LED 651 by arranging the surfaces on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 irradiates other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and is obliquely irradiated from the irradiation surface of the LED 651. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used for both the light for displaying the pattern or the pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating another irradiated body.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620 and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the back side, and the light emitted at the arrangement position of the LED 651 in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is projected plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be a position to be irradiated on the side end face. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in the front view circular shape. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the front side, and the light emitted at the arrangement position of the LED 651 in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Further, the LED 651 is arranged in a state where the light irradiation surface is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. The light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the above may be a position where the side end faces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated.

In addition, the LED 651 is arranged so that the light irradiation surface is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is applied to the front portion 632 of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the back portion 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right of the projection plate member 5620 is displayed on the projection plate member. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 due to the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection portion 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the unit is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second region and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns of the patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LED651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third regions are irradiated (for example, on the upper portion). The arranged light source incidents light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side incidents from the left end surface to irradiate the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side illuminates the right end. It is possible to irradiate the third region by injecting it from a surface), but there is a problem that a plurality of light sources need to be arranged and the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two regions, one is to irradiate the second or third region and the other is to irradiate the first region. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced by that amount, and it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the newly arranged drive motor and rotated.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, so that the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The amount of light emitted from the front of the can be partially increased or decreased. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced, and the shading of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. The case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664)) may be arranged in a manner in which two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern or pattern of each projection plate member 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and display patterns of the patterns, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the central side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 to form the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

Further, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when the light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape in the rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in the rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved shape, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2 to cause the inner wall and the protrusion of the sliding groove 966a2. The gap between the 945b and the 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes easier to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966 to form an inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945. The gap with the protrusion 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extending length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lightening amount due to the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2 and improve the rigidity of the displacement member 966.

In the seventh embodiment, the screw screwed into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is brought out from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is pulled inside the main body.

In this case, the displacement member 11966, 12966 is inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. The illegal object (thread) can be cut by using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is arranged in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Therefore, the case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an extended state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed of two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a displacement larger than that of the first member 11967. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member to increase the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 facing each other is formed so as to project in an annular shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by laterally shifting (side-sliding) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) in the lateral direction (direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction).

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not necessarily limited to this. A sticker that displays information consisting of characters or figures may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front) side of the throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930). ), Even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized, the position of the distribution unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). The form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be printing with ink or forming two colors.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a vehicle and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism is the driving force of the driving means. A rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member and a slide member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and a projecting portion is projected from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion is projected. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that a sliding groove through which the installation portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other are formed vertically at predetermined intervals, and a protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is the outer shape of the protruding portion (thick). If it is equivalent to (1), the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and is a slide member or a pair. A projecting portion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove does not incline with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be the same as the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. .. As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted protruding portion is slidable along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is omitted with respect to the wing member. It can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be set to a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member, the extending length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the slide member can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is slid displacement upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the position of the projecting portion at the time of starting is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, since the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation to, the inertial force increases by the amount that the weight of the slide member is added, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when opening or closing the wing member in the stopped state by starting the driving.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protrusion when the member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. As for the displacement component of the portion, the horizontal component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be reduced (minimized). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

The game machine A5 is characterized in that when the slide member starts a slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction, so that the weight of the wing member is increased. It can be rotated by (own weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started to be driven and opened.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and gravity. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the direction is formed.

According to the game machine A6, in either the game machine A4 or A5, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the axis of rotation and is inclined with respect to the plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity, even when the position of the protrusion is set downward along the direction of gravity of the axis of gravity of the wing member. , The projecting portion can be guided along the inclined direction of the inclined surface, and the slide displacement of the slide member in the upward direction of gravity can be smoothly started.

Further, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only the gap between the inner wall and the protruding portion can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion due to the contact of the protruding portion with the inclined surface. In addition to the gravitational displacement of the installation, horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member in the stopped state of being opened or closed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open posture or the closed posture even when it is affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine A7, the game machine A8 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion when the slide member is slidably displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member (own weight). ) Can be used to facilitate the maintenance of the protruding part being accepted by the receiving part.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the slide displacement direction are separated by a predetermined interval. The wing member is provided with a contact portion on the other side to which the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion, and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that at least the other side contact portion is in contact with the other side. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the direction of slide displacement with the one-sided abutted portion. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-sided contacted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side to cause wings. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair. A projecting portion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. In order to open the wing member, which is arranged so as to face the one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of the slide displacement. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the other side to be contacted, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is provided. The slide member is disengaged from the slide member, and the slide member is slid and displaced from the state in which the wing member is closed to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. Then, the gaming machine A10 characterized in that the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the direction of slide displacement with the one-sided contacted portion. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-sided contacted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side to cause wings. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide-displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. The shape is complicated because it is necessary to form the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be released.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said A game machine A11 characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A10, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine A12 is characterized by comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A11, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the ball, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter the ball from the entry port, and the ball is passed through the passage of the passage member. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part is the passage member. When rubbed against the edge portion, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge portion of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes. The gaming machine A13 is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges against each other.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A11, when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of the wing members cross each other. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be rubbed against each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter the ball from the entry port, and the ball is passed through the passage of the passage member. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide members (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine A12 or A13, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A14 game machine characterized by.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A12 or A13, the displacement of the wing member from the opening position to the closing position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the sliding member is said to be the same when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted and the one-sided contacted portion. A game characterized in that the other side contacted portion is provided with the other side contacted portion, and the one side contacted portion and the other side contacted portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. Machine A15.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion and the sliding member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with. A pair of wing members and rotation are provided because the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding the slide member and opening or closing the pair of wing members as the rotating member rotates. When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and also to the rotating member at two places, it rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the posture of the slide member with the member are unacceptable, and resistance occurs when the slide member is slid-displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), which hinders the opening or closing of the wing member. .. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is connected to the rotating member at one place, it is one of the pair of wing members. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member.

It should be noted that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in the state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And, it means a position on a virtual line along the direction of slide displacement.

In the game machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect of the game machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion, so that a pair. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the attitude of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member. It is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion. This is because the above-mentioned tolerance for posture change can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
The first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the second ball entry port. In a gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are the second opening / closing member. A game machine B1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, the first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the first (2) A gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a ball inlet and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the space, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, they are placed on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entry port). Space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is made into the first opening / closing member (first entry). It can be secured on the back of the ball mouth), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the total front projection area of the first drive means and the second drive means.

According to the game machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. Since it is made larger than the total front projected area of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the game machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are on the back side of the second entry port. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means enter the second ball. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back surface side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, the drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and the drive shaft, and the main body. The drive unit accommodated in the unit and the wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit are provided, and the first drive means and the second drive means use the drive shaft as the second drive shaft. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture toward an opening / closing member.

According to the game machine B5, in any of the game machines B1 to B4, the first drive means and the second drive means are a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. A drive unit that drives the drive unit and is housed in the main body unit, and a wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit provide a drive shaft. Since the two are arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily combined.

In the game machine B5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body are arranged. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface excluding the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces other than the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged. Is different in output, and even when the sizes of the main bodies of the two are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step. It becomes necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means and another area (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and is between the two areas. It is a barrier made of a conductor for limiting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed as, for example, a metal plate material.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the first passage member forming the passage of the game ball entered into the first entrance and the passage of the game ball entered into the second entrance are provided. A second passage member to be formed and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member are provided, and the first opening / closing member rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and includes the first passage member and the second passage, which are pivotally supported and include a pair of wing members that open or close the entrance. The gaming machine B7 includes a rotating member arranged between the members and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. Since it is provided with a rotating member arranged in the above and a sliding member that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members as the rotating member rotates, it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. Further, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the first passage member toward the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, so that the first ball entry port should be brought closer to the second ball entry port by that amount. Can be done.

In the game machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine B8 comprising a portion, wherein the first portion is formed by being bent in a substantially shape in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and the rotating member is extended from the rotating shaft and driven first. A second portion driven by the means is provided, and the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of rotation axis, so that the first driving means can be used while securing the slide amount of the slide member. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) of the first portion is connected from the rotating shaft to the slide member in the present invention. When the linear distance to the portion is set to be equal to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. .. On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is used. The distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the slide amount of the slide member becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide member can be slid while the first driving means and the slide can be slid. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the game machine B8, the game machine B9 is characterized in that the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first part which is opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member to reduce the size as a whole.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second entry port is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member and the first driving means. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that it is arranged between the two.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor for detecting the game ball entering the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor opens and closes the second. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first driving means from the second entry port, a part of the detection sensor makes the first Since the driving means can be hidden, such cheating can be made difficult.

In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of the detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be detected. In the present invention in which the first opening / closing member is arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even if the second opening / closing member is opened and an illegality is applied to the first driving means from the second entry port. By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the location where the fraud is applied becomes invisible. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

In the game machine B10, a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member are provided, a pair of the detection sensors are arranged, and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first drive means from the second entry port, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. Therefore, such a gap (between the pair of detection sensors facing each other). By setting the screw member at the fastening position, the unshielded area in front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult.

The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and may be used to fasten and fix the two members, or may be used to fasten and fix another member to the case member. good. Further, the screw member is preferably made of metal.

In the game machine B11, the game machine B12 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. Therefore, for example, the second opening / closing member is opened to enter the second position. When fraud is applied to the first driving means from the ball mouth, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the wiring is damaged due to the fraudulent act. It can be easily (broken). Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

In the game machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effect of the game machine B12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to cheat the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

In the game machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. Game machine B14 to play.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effect of the game machine B12 or B13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Since it is formed, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (break) the wiring by shifting the position (side slip) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the.

In any of the game machines B12 to B14, the game machine B15 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the game machine B15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to cheat the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
The game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and having the above-mentioned In a game machine provided with a second member arranged on the back side of the game board, a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member. A game machine C1 comprising a third member having and.

Here, a game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. There is known a game machine having a second member and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, after passing through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, the first 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, a third member having a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member is provided. Can be used to position the second member with respect to the first member.

In the game machine C1, the game board is provided with an opening in which an opening is formed and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in an internal space. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the third member is arranged in the internal space of the portion.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the game board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in the internal space. Since the third member is arranged in the internal space of the opening, it is not necessary to separately provide the opening for arranging the third member. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arrangement space for the third member, the processing man-hours are reduced and the product cost is reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the third member engages the first engaging portion with the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion with the second passage of the second member. A game machine C3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine C3, in the game machine C1 or C2, the first engaging portion of the third member is in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion is in the second passage of the second member. Since they are engaged, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (the first). Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is effective as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the game machine C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that a part of an inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be made easier to tolerate.

A game machine C5, wherein in any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that the first member and the second member are formed on the front and back surfaces of the game board. When each member is attached, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine C5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the game machine C6 is characterized in that the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. ..

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, it is not necessary to separately perform the work of engaging the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A game machine C7 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the first member and the third member to the game board at the same time and then attaching the second member to the back surface of the game board, the third member can be attached at the same time as the mounting operation. 2 The engaging portion can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member to be fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third member is attached to the fixing member. A game machine C8, wherein the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed or integrally formed on the fixing member, the first member can hold (arrange) the third member at the same time as the work of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first member is formed so that the game ball can enter the ball, and rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port and the entry port communicating with the first passage. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and the driving force of the driving means are the pair of wings. The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the members, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism is a pair of a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pair that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, it is on the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage as compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine C9, the slide member includes a projecting portion in which the pair of wing members project toward the slide member, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the third member includes a concealed surface portion facing an opening on the side opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C9, a pair of wing members are provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted into the sliding portion. Since the slide member is provided with the moving groove and the third member is provided with the lining surface portion facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding member is slid by the lining surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of wing members.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entry opening, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered in the entry opening is rolled, and its rolling. A game machine D1 comprising a passage member into which a game ball that has rolled on a surface flows in, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the entry port are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The entry port is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entry opening are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member even when the entrance is enlarged. Length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened accordingly, and the passage member can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine D1 includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry port, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is provided at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. The gaming machine D3, which is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball which is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guiding means is provided in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is disposed between the side end portion and the passage member, when the game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the entry port, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member to prevent it from staying at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D3 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. ..

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member is provided. Therefore, the rolling surface can accept the game ball that rolls in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

In the game machine D4, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the guide groove is extended linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the length of the rolling surface. The game ball that rolls in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) to the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the guide groove, It is possible to guide the game balls to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In any of the game machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region in which the first guiding means is arranged so as to sandwich the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine D7, wherein the second region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is arranged. Since the second region on the opposite side of the first region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region, a game ball that has entered the second region or a game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region. Can be swiftly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward inclination of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine D7 is characterized in that the game machine D7 includes a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7, since the second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D7 or D8, a game that is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and rolls the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine D9 is provided with a second guiding means formed so as to guide the ball to the entrance side.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7 or D8, it is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is set in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. Since the second guiding means is provided so that the game ball rolled along the ball can be guided to the entrance side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the game machine D9 when the ball entrance is opened.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the ball when the entrance is open. , The game ball guided to the entrance side by the second guiding means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry port as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward a side surface portion opposite to the first guiding means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is separated from the entrance as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. As it is tilted in the direction, its upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball quickly flows into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the entrance. Can be made to.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region toward the passage member, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are from the entrance. Since the risk of jumping out to the outside is low, by contacting the side edge of the second guiding means and guiding it to the ball entry side, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region. It can be suppressed and flowed into the passage member faster by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to get over the upper surface of the second guiding means and guide it to the first region (first guiding means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing the ball from popping out from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means extended in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The size of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is made larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine D12.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is made larger than the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means, the game ball that has passed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In the game machine D11 or D12, the game machine D13 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effect of the game machine D11 or D12, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means, so that the upper surface of the second guide means is included. The game ball that has overcome the above can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guide means to reliably decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines D8 to D13, the game machine D14 is characterized in that the second guide means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D8 to D13, the second guide means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction, so that the first guide means is located. Even when the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the above is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the second guide means. , It is possible to decelerate, and it is possible to easily position it in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The game machine D14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member, and the second guide means is provided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. The game machine D15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effect of the game machine D14, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member is provided, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When it is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact (collision) with the second guide means. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated, can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines D1 to D15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member is provided, and the groove width of the guide groove is widened. The gaming machine D16, which is characterized in that it becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the game machine D16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a game machine provided with an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the entry port, and a game board on which the entry unit is arranged. An opening is formed in the game board in the plate thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. A first unit to be provided and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board are provided. A game machine E1 characterized by.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. Since one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and being arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board are provided, the front surface of the game board is provided. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passage) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting (combining) the game board, the game board You can effectively use the space in front of.

In the game machine E1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. A game machine E2 characterized in that it is arranged at overlapping positions.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is formed in a front view. Since it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board is formed from plywood or a sticker is attached to the game board. Since it is permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that it flows down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit. The game ball to be played can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion overlapping the second passage of the second unit is formed of the light transmitting material in the front view. This is because the flow of the game ball can be visually recognized to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light-transmitting material.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light-transmitting material, so that through the first unit. When the second unit is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine E4, the game machine E5 is characterized in that information composed of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of display modes include printing with ink, sticking of stickers, and two-color molding.

In any of the game machines E1 to E5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage. And a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. A second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed are provided. The game machine E6 is characterized in that detection sensors for detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the game machine E6, in any of the game machines E1 to E5, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. The second upstream unit and the second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and forming a plurality of second connecting passages are provided, and the passage of a game ball is detected in the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensors are arranged, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having a smaller number of second branch passages to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, the number of detection sensors arranged is increased. It is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passage, the detection sensors can be arranged as many as the number of the second connecting passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is provided. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to arrange one detection sensor, but only for the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that the detection sensor will be arranged. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

In the game machine E6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A game machine E7 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and the ball is entered into the second entry port. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the first unit and the third passage of the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by the combination.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Is directly or indirectly engaged to position the second unit with respect to the first unit, so that positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so that the second passage is relative to the first passage. Or the third passages are directly or indirectly engaged with each other for positioning, so that even a separate unit can be positioned with respect to the first unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the misalignment (as compared with the case of positioning other parts) The occurrence of steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In any of the game machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is projected toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding detection sensor is projected. The gaming machine E9, characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by engaging the detection sensor with the receiving portion. While making it possible to do this, it is possible to suppress the part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole.

In the game machines E1 to E6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. However, in the second unit, the gaming machine E10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of the game machines E1 to E9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. Since it is formed in, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front surface to the back surface of the second unit, and the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend at the bent portion. The game machine E11 is characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the ground, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is formed. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion in the portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, by erecting the erecting portion from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bending of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve the durability, and the game ball is moved along the erecting tip of the erecting portion. While it is possible to guide the bent portion to flow down smoothly, the standing portion is located in front of the game ball in front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing portion and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a gaming machine provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member in which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The game machine F1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ..

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , The timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end, so that the game ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side on which the game ball is affected can be surely made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and it is possible to easily disperse the influence, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes). ) Can be made.

In the game machine F1 or F2, among the downstream ends of the first passage member, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member is provided with a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface, and the second passage member is the upstream end thereof. The gaming machine F3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the wall and receives the protruding piece, and a portion of the protruding piece facing the protruding tip is provided as an upstream end of the side wall.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the first passage member is projected from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is the side downstream end. The second passage member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the upstream end thereof to receive the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the game machine F3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side (bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the game machine F3, since the game machine protruding piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the first The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it, so that the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member). Also, the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball is likely to be hindered as compared with the step) in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position. Therefore, as in the game machine F3, the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member can be regulated at a position where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

In the game machine F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. Compared with the case where the game ball is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In the game machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, as compared with the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. You can make it harder to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In this case, according to the game machine F5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where it is formed in a shape (stepped shape) having protruding pieces or recesses, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed for molding. It is possible to improve the sex.

In the game machines F4 and F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4 or F5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passage direction of the game machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pressed toward the bottom surface. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced up at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that, when displaced, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry opening, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball. When the pair of wing members is opened by the driving means to be driven and the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wings are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry port, and the pair of wings are arranged by the driving force of the driving means. There is known a gaming machine provided with a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for restricting the entry of a game ball into a ball entry port when a member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when a pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can be entered. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate the entry of balls.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, for example, the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position after the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when a pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. In a state where a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sling member when the slide member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. , The gaming machine G2 characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine G2, the game machine G3 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate the slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine G2 or G3, the game machine G4 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2 or G3, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion, and thus the weight of the slide member. By using (own weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion.

In the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the one side contacted portion is provided. One side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the slide member, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least until the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side to be contacted, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion slides. When the slide member is disengaged from the member and the slide member is slidably displaced from the state in which the wing member is closed to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. The gaming machine G6, characterized in that the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide-displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. The shape is complicated because it is necessary to form the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be released.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said The gaming machine G7, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G6, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a ball and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball inserted into the ball entry port. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a passage member forming the passage, and a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread is in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the game ball multiple times by operating (drawing and pulling) the other end of the ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball and the detection sensor detects it a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts caused by the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times.

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member and the slide member to rub against the edge of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. A game machine H2 characterized by having a rubbing portion.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member is the passage member. Since it is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. A game machine H3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, a pair of wing members cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. Since the transmission mechanism includes a cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide members (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine H2 or H3, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine H4 characterized by.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a game machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. The gaming machine I1 is provided with the emission increasing means for increasing the emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiating means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmitting member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to see, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The position of forming the reflection portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means is irradiated to the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected on the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member is correspondingly increased. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be increased, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, when another device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and incident light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I2, the game machine I3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively, so that among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, the light transmitting member The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and is emitted to the front side and the light that is emitted to the back side of the light transmitting member are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved accordingly.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even when the light emitted by another device in the game area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I2 or I3, the game machine I4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , The overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) can be reflected to facilitate the incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved accordingly.

In any of the game machines I2 to I4, the game machine I5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I5, in the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine I4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or totally reflected) at the boundary with and, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines I2 to I5, the game machine I6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I6, in the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indexes of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine I5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or totally reflected) at the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines I2 to I6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine I7 characterized by including a driving means.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in a ring shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. Therefore, by rotationally driving the pinion gear by the drive means, the pinion gear is rotationally driven. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member also has a role of concentrating the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and a role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines I2 to I7, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in a ring shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably supported by a shaft, or may be fixed so as not to be rotatable. In this case, as a form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which the fixed support ring slides along the guide groove.

Further, in the game machine I8 subordinate to the game machine I7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the front side or the back side, respectively. That is, since the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and can be incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the opposite space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A game machine I9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect of the game machine I8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are opposed to each other. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiation surface. The gaming machine I10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated by the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front or the back of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The featured game machine J1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (Ab.). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective portion, while applying a plurality of light emitting means to an irradiation surface on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member by arranging the light emitting means so as to surround the circumference of the target member (unknown at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each of them has a different orientation), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in an elastically deformed predetermined posture. Since the base member is provided, at least two or more light emitting means can be arranged by arranging one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The game machine J1 is characterized in that the game machine J1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , Warping and bending of the substrate member can be suppressed, and the posture of the substrate member can be easily defined. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the game machine J2, the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be more easily maintained.

In the game machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A game machine J4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastic. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the game machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member opposite to the target member. A game machine J5 characterized in that it is arranged on the back surface.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the board member.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw can be brought into contact with the member to prevent the movable member from being brought into contact with the light emitting means and damaged.

In the game machine J6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because the light emitting means can be easily brought into contact with the head of the screw by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the game machines J2 to J7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is provided on the other side of the base body or the block body. A game machine J8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines J2 to J7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the base body or the other side of the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member and the block bodies are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the game machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a recess on the side surface disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess on the block body. A game machine J9 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine J9, in any of the game machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess on the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member arranged on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state where the base member is disposed in the form of being displaced in the direction and the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine K1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A gaming machine is known that produces an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes people visually recognize is performed. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member is centered on this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be regarded as a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the game machine K1, the displacement member is formed in such a form that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine K2.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The game machine K2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2, the transmission means is rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are provided. When a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to a force is performed on a displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine K3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction of connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction of connecting the members, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the pushing and pulling directions. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the game machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is closer to the central side range. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position than the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member. , When the displacement member is made to perform a reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the game machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A game machine K6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of the game machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since the range is set, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an overhang position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the game machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The game machine K7.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being arranged at the position, the rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed by the action of the dead center described above, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the game machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the members and the connecting members and on the side opposite to the connecting positions of the displacement members and the base members with the connecting positions of the rotating members and the connecting members interposed therebetween. Game machine K8.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , When the displacement member rattles against the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, since the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant, so that the player can produce a surprising effect. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the first. 2 Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the game machine L1, the first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and the second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. The gaming machine L2 is provided with a second member driven by the displacement member, and the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the first member which is displaceably arranged on the base member and is driven by the first driving means and the first member which is slidably displaceable on the base member. The first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine L2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation centers the same and different in the rotation directions, but forming them in different rotation directions and different rotation centers. Therefore, it is possible to greatly change the displacement mode of the displacement member, and it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

In the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin protruding from the is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed according to whether or not the second member is linearly displaced. it can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member which are displaced in a curved shape. A rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized, for example, to simplify its structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the game machine L3, the game machine L4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so that the first driving means or the second In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine L4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one in which the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the unexpected effect of the player.

In the game machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A game machine L5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of the game machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It has become possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines L1 to L5, a second displacement member displaceable is provided on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement member is displaced. While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Game machine L6.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L5, a second displacement member displaceable is provided on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceable between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a light-transmitting portion made of a light-transmitting material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that the mode visually recognized by the player is not changed so much that it is difficult to have an interest.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both. The mode that the player visually recognizes can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member to be irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples thereof include forms to be used and forms in which these are combined.

The game machine M2 is characterized in that the game machine M1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine M3 characterized by.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacement of the target member, the player can visually recognize different parts of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflection portion is visible through the opening, and a second group different from the first group are openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible through the first position, by arranging the target member in the first position, the target member is placed through the opening of the shielding member by the first group. The first pattern or pattern to be formed is made visible to the player, while the target member is displaced from the first position to the second position so that the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern through the opening of the shielding member. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine M4 to play.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, the target member is formed in a front view circular shape or an annular shape, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the rotation center. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the game machine M2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in a circular plate shape in a front view and is formed with a reflecting portion, and emits light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from a side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member, which is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M6, the target member is formed of a light transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating the light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or the pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in the rotated state. it can.

In the game machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of the game machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The game machine M7 is characterized in that the game machine M1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. Therefore, by combining the displacements of both, the target member by the light irradiation means can be used. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, the mode in which the player visually recognizes can be further changed, and the player can easily have an interest.

The game machine M7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect of the game machine M7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are brought into contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacement of the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displace the light irradiation means. it can.

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A game machine K1 in any of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and In any of M1 to M8, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and In any one of M1 to M8, the gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotation and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-23409).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activities.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing fraudulent acts.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is rotatably supported by a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter and a position sandwiching the ball entry port. A pair of wing members that open or close the wings, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members. A passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and a part of the transmission mechanism is a passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position. Cross the aisle.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1. In the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member. The slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the passage member.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1. In the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member and mutually when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. It is provided with a pair of cutting members for rubbing the edges of the two.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, fraudulent activity can be suppressed.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 60 Base board (game board)
60a through hole (opening)
64 1st prize opening (1st passage)
140 2nd winning opening (entry entrance, 1st entrance)
65a Specified winning opening (second entry opening)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 bogie member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 protruding member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L lower left rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488R Lower right rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488b drive pin (connecting pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base member 611, 5611, 6612 Back base (base member)
612,5612 Front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 Reflector 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Grooving member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Board member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 Second block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Protruding part 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (driving means)
940 Front unit (1st member, 1st unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second throwing part (part of the first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of the first passage member)
945 wing member (first opening / closing member)
945b protrusion (protruding part)
951 Plate member (second opening / closing member, opening / closing member)
953a1 opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Circular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Protruding part (second guiding means)
954c2 Side side 954c3 Side edge 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 2nd guide surface (1st inclined surface)
954d2 2nd side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed part (passage member)
957a1 Main body 957a2 Shaft (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm (2nd engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g protruding part (first engaging part)
140 2nd winning opening (entry entrance, 2nd entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of the first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Protruding part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966,8966,11966,12966,14966,18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of the first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (reception part)
966b2 One side contacted part 966b3 Other side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 2nd blade (part of cutting member)
6683 Blade (part of cutting member)
970 throwing unit (second unit)
980 distribution unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bent part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide section (standing section)
985e1,985f1 Inflow passage (second connecting passage)
900 aisle unit (second downstream unit)
991c1,991d1 Recessed part (accepting part)
TR0 throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of the 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of the 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detector (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw C collar (support wheel)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center side range)

Claims (3)

A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members.
A passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position. A game machine featuring. The transmission mechanism includes a contact portion in which the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member rubs against the edge of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that. The transmission mechanism is characterized by including a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images